DK201670725A1

DK201670725A1 - Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Generating Tactile Outputs

Info

Publication number: DK201670725A1
Application number: DKPA201670725A
Authority: DK
Inventors: Julien Y Robert; Tyler M Fox; Viktor Milandinov
Original assignee: Apple Inc
Priority date: 2016-09-06
Filing date: 2016-09-19
Publication date: 2018-03-19
Also published as: DK201670724A1; DK179802B1; DK180050B1

Abstract

An electronic device receives, at an application-independent module, from an application-specific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input directed to the user interface of the first application. An operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module. The information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input. The device generates a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application. The tactile output has the tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module. The tactile output has an amplitude determined in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input.

Description

<¹θ> DANMARK <¹°> DK 2016 70725 A1

(12)

PATENTANSØGNING

Patent- og

Varemærkestyrelsen (51) Int.CI.: G06F 3/01(2006.01) (21) Ansøgningsnummer: PA 2016 70725 (22) Indleveringsdato: 2016-09-19 (24) Løbedag: 2016-09-19 (41) Aim. tilgængelig: 2018-03-07 (62) Stamansøgning nr: PA2016 70720 (30) Prioritet: 2016-09-06 US 62/384,159 (71) Ansøger: Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino 95014, California, USA (72) Opfinder: Julien Y. Robert, c/o Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino, 95014 California, USA Tyler M. Fox, c/o Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino, 95014 California, USA

Viktor Milandinov, c/o Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino, 95014 California, USA (74) Fuldmægtig: Zacco Denmark A/S, Arne Jacobsens Allé 15, 2300 København S, Danmark (54) Benævnelse: Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Generating Tactile Outputs (56) Fremdragne publikationer:

US 2013/0201115 A1 US 9092953 B1 US 2011/0267294 A1 US 2007/0146316 A1 US 2012/0249461 A1 US 2004/0233161 A1 WO 01/24158 A1 (57) Sammendrag:

Fortsættes ...

DK 2016 70725 A1

Figure 1A

DK 2016 70725 A1

Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Generating Tactile Outputs

TECHNICAL FIELD [0001] This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces that generate tactile outputs to provide haptic feedback to a user.

BACKGROUND [0002] The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years. Example touchsensitive surfaces include touchpads and touch-screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to manipulate user interfaces and objects therein on a display. Example user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics.

[0003] Haptic feedback, typically in combination with visual and/or audio feedback, is often used in an attempt to make manipulation of user interfaces and user interface objects more efficient and intuitive for a user, thereby improving the operability of electronic devices.

[0004] However, applications that provide different haptic feedback in response to a same gesture present challenges to users, which may lead to unintended operations. When devices perform unintended operations, the user needs to cancel such operations and provide inputs again. These manipulations are cumbersome and tedious. In addition, having to undo unintended operations and providing inputs again take longer than necessary, thereby wasting energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in batteryoperated devices. Thus, it would be desirable to have a framework for providing haptic feedback.

SUMMARY [0005] Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with faster, more efficient, and more consistent methods and interfaces for providing haptic feedback (typically in

DK 2016 70725 A1 conjunction with visual and/or audio feedback), which in turn make manipulation of user interfaces more efficient and intuitive for a user. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for providing haptic feedback. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user by helping the user to understand the connection between provided inputs and device responses to the inputs, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. In addition, such methods and interfaces provide a more consistent human-machine interface for a plurality of software applications. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.

[0006] The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI primarily through stylus and/or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

[0007] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, one or more input devices, and one or more tactile output generators. The method includes displaying, on the display, a user interface for a first software application. The user interface includes a plurality of elements to which user interaction models from a plurality of user interaction models provided by an application2

DK 2016 70725 A1 independent module have been assigned, the plurality of elements including a first element to which a first user interaction model has been assigned, the plurality of elements having content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application. The first user interaction model defines how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the first element of the user interface. The method also includes, while displaying the user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to the first element of the user interface. The method further includes, in response to detecting the input: updating the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the input; in accordance with a determination that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, generating a first tactile output corresponding to the input; and, in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, forgoing generation of the first tactile output.

[0008] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. The method includes displaying, on the display, a user interface; and detecting an occurrence of a first condition that triggers a first user interface event that is associated with a tactile output. Generating the first user interface event includes displaying one or more changes to the user interface. The device will not be able to generate the tactile output associated with the first user interface event for a respective amount of time. The method also includes, in response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds to a first user interface event category: delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time; and, after delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time, displaying the one or more changes to the user interface and generating the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event. The display of the one or more changes to the user interface is synchronized with the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event.

[0009] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. The method includes, while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, receiving an indication that a user interaction has started. A respective portion of the user interaction is associated with a tactile output. The low-power state is a

DK 2016 70725 A1 state in which tactile outputs are generated with a first amount of latency. The method also includes, in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, setting the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state at a first time. The low-latency state is a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency. The method further includes, after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state: in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that the one or more tactile output generators are still in the low-latency state, generating the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the second amount of latency; and, in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, transitioning the one or more tactile output generators from the low-latency state to the low-power state.

[0010] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. The method includes, while a first type of event is associated with a first tactile output and a second type of event that is distinct from the first type of event is associated with a second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output by an applicationindependent module, receiving first information from a first application; and, in response to receiving the first information from the first application, generating a response to the first information, including: in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the first type, generating the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the second type that is distinct from the first type, generating, using the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output. The method also includes, after generating the response to the first information, receiving second information from a second application that is distinct from the first application; and, in response to receiving the second information from the second application, generating a response to the second information, including: in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an

DK 2016 70725 A1 application event of the first type, generating the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the second type, generating the second tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators.

[0011] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. The method includes receiving, at an application-independent module, from an application-specific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input directed to a user interface of the first application. An operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module. The information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input. The method also includes, in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application. The tactile output has the tactile output pattem specified by the application-specific module. The tactile output has an amplitude determined in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input.

[0012] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. The method includes displaying a user interface on the display; and, while displaying the user interface on the display and while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, detecting a first user interaction via the touch-sensitive surface. The method also includes, in response to detecting the first user interaction, setting the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state; and, after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, detecting a second user interaction that is part of a same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction. The method further includes, in response to detecting the second user interaction, generating a tactile output that corresponds to the second user interaction.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0013] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. The method includes receiving a first request for a first user interface operation. The first user interface operation is a first type of change in a respective user interface element that is associated with a first tactile output. The method also includes, in response to receiving the first request: performing the first user interface operation and generating the first tactile output. The method further includes, after performing the first user interface operation, receiving a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output; and, in response to receiving the second request, in accordance with a determination that the second request for the second user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with the second tactile output: determining a time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the second request; in accordance with a determination that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, performing the second user interface operation without generating the second tactile output; and, in accordance with a determination that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, performing the second user interface operation and generating the second tactile output.

[0014] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. The method includes, at an application-independent module, receiving user interface information from an application. The user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an application-specific module of the application. The method also includes receiving an input directed toward one or more of the displayed user interface elements; and, at the application-independent module, determining one or more tactile outputs to be generated based on a magnitude of the input and the one or more dimensions defined by the applications-specific module; and, using the one or more tactile output generators, generating the determined one or more tactile outputs.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0015] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; one or more input device units configured to receive inputs; one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the one or more input device units, and the one or more tactile output generator units. The processing unit is configured to enable display, on the display unit, of a user interface for a first software application. The user interface includes a plurality of elements to which user interaction models from a plurality of user interaction models provided by an applicationindependent module have been assigned, the plurality of elements including a first element to which a first user interaction model has been assigned, the plurality of elements having content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application. The first user interaction model defines how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the first element of the user interface. The processing unit is also configured to, while enabling display of the user interface, detect, via the one or more input device units, an input directed to the first element of the user interface; and, in response to detecting the input: update the user interface on the display unit based on characteristics of the input; in accordance with a determination that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, enable generation of a first tactile output corresponding to the input; and, in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, forgo enabling generation of the first tactile output.

[0016] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs; one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generator units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display, on the display unit, of a user interface; and detect an occurrence of a first condition that triggers a first user interface event that is associated with a tactile output. Generating the first user interface event includes enabling display of one or more changes to the user interface. The device will not be able to generate the tactile output associated with the first user interface event for a respective amount of time. The processing unit is also configured to, in response to detecting the occurrence of

DK 2016 70725 A1 the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds to a first user interface event category, enable generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event; delay generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time; and, after delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time, enable display of the one or more changes to the user interface. The display of the one or more changes to the user interface is synchronized with the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event.

[0017] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs; one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generator units. The processing unit is configured to: while the one or more tactile output generator units are in a low-power state, receive an indication that a user interaction has started. A respective portion of the user interaction is associated with a tactile output. The low-power state is a state in which tactile outputs are generated with a first amount of latency. The processing unit is also configured to, in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, set the one or more tactile output generator units to a low-latency state at a first time. The low-latency state is a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency. The processing unit is further configured to, after setting the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state: in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that the one or more tactile output generator units are still in the low-latency state, enable generation of the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units with the second amount of latency; and, in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, transition the one or more tactile output generator units from the low-latency state to the low-power state.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0018] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs; one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the one or more input device units, and the one or more tactile output generator units. The processing unit is configured to, while a first type of event is associated with a first tactile output and a second type of event that is distinct from the first type of event is associated with a second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output by an applicationindependent module: receive first information from a first application; and, in response to receiving the first information from the first application, enable generation of a response to the first information, including: in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enable generation of the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units; and, in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the second type that is distinct from the first type, enable generation, using the one or more tactile output generator units, of the second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output. The processing unit is also configured to, after enabling generation of the response to the first information, receive second information from a second application that is distinct from the first application; and, in response to receiving the second information from the second application, enable generation of a response to the second information, including: in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enable generation of the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units; and, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the second type, enable generation of the second tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units.

[0019] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs; one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generator units. The processing unit is configured to receive, at an application-independent module, from an application-specific module that is associated with a first application, information about an

DK 2016 70725 A1 input directed to a user interface of the first application. An operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module. The information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input. The processing unit is also configured to, in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, enable generation, via the one or more tactile output generator units, of a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application. The tactile output has the tactile output pattern specified by the applicationspecific module. The tactile output has an amplitude determined in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input.

[0020] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs; one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generator units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display of a user interface on the display unit; while enabling display of the user interface on the display unit and while the one or more tactile output generator units are in a low-power state, detect a first user interaction via the touchsensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the first user interaction, set the one or more tactile output generator units to a low-latency state; after setting the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state, detect a second user interaction that is part of a same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction; and, in response to detecting the second user interaction, enable generation of a tactile output that corresponds to the second user interaction.

[0021] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs; one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generator units. The processing unit is configured to receive a first request for a first user interface operation.

DK 2016 70725 A1

The first user interface operation is a first type of change in a respective user interface element that is associated with a first tactile output. The processing unit is also configured to, in response to receiving the first request: perform the first user interface operation and enable generation of the first tactile output; and, after performing the first user interface operation, receive a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output. The processing unit is further configured to, in response to receiving the second request, in accordance with a determination that the second request for the second user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with a second tactile output: determine a time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the second request; in accordance with a determination that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, perform the second user interface operation without enabling generation of the second tactile output; and, in accordance with a determination that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, perform the second user interface operation and enable generation of the second tactile output.

[0022] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs; one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generator units. The processing unit is configured to receive, at an application-independent module, user interface information from an application. The user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an application-specific module of the application. The processing unit is also configured to receive an input directed toward one or more of the displayed user interface elements; determine, at the application-independent module, one or more tactile outputs to be generated based on a magnitude of the input and the one or more dimensions defined by the applications-specific module; and enable generation of the determined one or more tactile outputs using the one or more tactile output generator units.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0023] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, one or more processors, memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a computer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use in an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, includes means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.

[0024] Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for providing tactile outputs, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for providing tactile outputs.

DK 2016 70725 A1

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0025] For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.

[0026] Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.

[0027] Figure IB is a block diagram illustrating example components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.

[0028] Figure 1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module in accordance with some embodiments.

[0029] Figures ID-IE are block diagrams illustrating application-independent software modules in accordance with some embodiments.

[0030] Figure 2A illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.

[0031] Figures 2B-2C show exploded views of an intensity-sensitive input device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0032] Figure 3 is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.

[0033] Figure 4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0034] Figure 4B illustrates an example user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.

[0035] Figures 4C-4E illustrate examples of dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments.

[0036] Figures 4F-4G illustrate a set of sample tactile output patterns in accordance with some embodiments.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0037] Figures 5A-5KKK illustrate example user interfaces and tactile outputs in accordance with some embodiments.

[0038] Figures 6A-6D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of generating tactile outputs based on user interaction models in accordance with some embodiments.

[0039] Figure 7 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0040] Figures 8A-8D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of synchronizing tactile outputs and user interface changes in accordance with some embodiments.

[0041] Figure 9 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0042] Figures 10A-10D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of setting power/latency states of tactile output generators in accordance with some embodiments.

[0043] Figure 11 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0044] Figures 12A-12D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of generating consistent tactile outputs for multiple applications in accordance with some embodiments.

[0045] Figure 13 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0046] Figures 14A-14B are flow diagrams illustrating a method of generating tactile outputs based on information from an application-specific module in accordance with some embodiments.

[0047] Figure 15 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0048] Figures 16A-16D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of setting power/latency states of tactile output generators based on user interaction events in accordance with some embodiments.

[0049] Figure 17 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0050] Figures 18A-18C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of conditionally generating tactile outputs based on a time interval from a previous tactile output generation in accordance with some embodiments.

[0051] Figure 19 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0052] Figures 20A-20B are flow diagrams illustrating a method of generating tactile outputs based on a magnitude of an input and dimensions of a user interface element in accordance with some embodiments.

[0053] Figure 21 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS [0054] Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces that allow certain manipulations of displayed user interface objects in response to certain touch inputs. However, various software applications may be configured to respond in an inconsistent manner (e.g., providing different haptic feedback) to a same input, which makes it more challenging for a user to learn how to interact with different software applications and/or what particular haptic feedbacks indicate. The disclosed embodiments address these limitations and disadvantages by providing a common framework for providing haptic feedback (and/or tactile outputs). Because instructions for providing tactile outputs are provided in electronic devices (e.g., in an operating system), software applications can be developed faster and made smaller, thereby improving the efficiency in storing and executing such software applications on electronic devices. In addition, various software applications respond to a same input in a consistent manner (e.g., by providing a consistent haptic feedback) using the common framework, thereby improving user experience with such electronic devices. For battery-operated devices, the disclosed methods and devices conserve battery power and increase the time between battery charges. Furthermore, software applications can subscribe to different features of the common framework, thereby allowing the software applications to customize responses to inputs without losing the consistency and advanced features of the common framework.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0055] Below, Figures IA-IE, 2A-2C, and 3 provide a description of example devices. Figures 4A-4B and 5A-5KKK illustrate example user interfaces and associated tactile outputs. Figures 6A-6D illustrate a flow diagram of a method of generating tactile outputs based on user interaction models. Figures 8A-8D illustrate a flow diagram of a method of synchronizing tactile outputs and user interface changes. Figures 10A-10D illustrate a flow diagram of a method of setting power/latency states of tactile output generators. Figures 12A-12D illustrate a flow diagram of a method of generating consistent tactile outputs for multiple applications. Figures 14A-14B illustrate a flow diagram of a method of generating tactile outputs based on information from an application-specific module. Figures 16A-16D illustrate a flow diagram of a method of setting power/latency states of tactile output generators based on user interaction events. Figures 18A-18C illustrate a flow diagram of a method of conditionally generating tactile outputs based on a time interval from a previous tactile output generation. Figures 20A-20B illustrate a flow diagram of a method of generating tactile outputs based on a magnitude of an input and dimensions of a user interface element. The user interfaces in Figures 5A-5KKK are used to illustrate the processes in Figures 6A-6D, 8A-8D, 10A-10D, 12A-12D, 14A-14B, 16A-16D, 18A-18C, and 20A-20B.

EXAMPFE DEVICES [0056] Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.

[0057] It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various

DK 2016 70725 A1 described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

[0058] The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.

[0059] As used herein, the term “if’ is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.

[0060] Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Example embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch-screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touchsensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display and/or a touchpad).

[0061] In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the

DK 2016 70725 A1 electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick.

[0062] The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.

[0063] The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.

[0064] Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays. Figure IA is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display. Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (FO) subsystem 106, other input or control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touchsensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch18

DK 2016 70725 A1 sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.

[0065] As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch.

For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user’s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user. Using tactile outputs to provide haptic feedback to a user enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0066] In some embodiments, a tactile output pattem specifies characteristics of a tactile output, such as the amplitude of the tactile output, the shape of a movement waveform of the tactile output, the frequency of the tactile output, and/or the duration of the tactile output.

[0067] When tactile outputs with different tactile output patterns are generated by a device (e.g., via one or more tactile output generators that move a moveable mass to generate tactile outputs), the tactile outputs may invoke different haptic sensations in a user holding or touching the device. While the sensation of the user is based on the user’s perception of the tactile output, most users will be able to identify changes in waveform, frequency, and amplitude of tactile outputs generated by the device. Thus, the waveform, frequency and amplitude can be adjusted to indicate to the user that different operations have been performed. As such, tactile outputs with tactile output patterns that are designed, selected, and/or engineered to simulate characteristics (e.g., size, material, weight, stiffness, smoothness, etc.); behaviors (e.g., oscillation, displacement, acceleration, rotation, expansion, etc.); and/or interactions (e.g., collision, adhesion, repulsion, attraction, friction, etc.) of objects in a given environment (e.g., a user interface that includes graphical features and objects, a simulated physical environment with virtual boundaries and virtual objects, a real physical environment with physical boundaries and physical objects, and/or a combination of any of the above) will, in some circumstances, provide helpful feedback to users that reduces input errors and increases the efficiency of the user’s operation of the device. Additionally, tactile outputs are, optionally, generated to correspond to feedback that is unrelated to a simulated physical characteristic, such as an input threshold or a selection of an object. Such tactile outputs will, in some circumstances, provide helpful feedback to users that reduces input errors and increases the efficiency of the user’s operation of the device.

[0068] In some embodiments, a tactile output with a suitable tactile output pattern serves as a cue for the occurrence of an event of interest in a user interface or behind the scenes in a device. Examples of the events of interest include activation of an affordance (e.g., a real or virtual button, or toggle switch) provided on the device or in a user interface, success or failure of a requested operation, reaching or crossing a boundary in a user interface, entry into a new state, switching of input focus between objects, activation of a new mode, reaching or crossing an input threshold, detection or recognition of a type of

DK 2016 70725 A1 input or gesture, etc. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are provided to serve as a warning or an alert for an impending event or outcome that would occur unless a redirection or interruption input is timely detected. Tactile outputs are also used in other contexts to enrich the user experience, improve the accessibility of the device to users with visual or motor difficulties or other accessibility needs, and/or improve efficiency and functionality of the user interface and/or the device. Tactile outputs are optionally accompanied with audio outputs and/or visible user interface changes, which further enhance a user’s experience when the user interacts with a user interface and/or the device, and facilitate better conveyance of information regarding the state of the user interface and/or the device, and which reduce input errors and increase the efficiency of the user’s operation of the device.

[0069] Figure 4F provides a set of sample tactile output patterns that may be used, either individually or in combination, either as is or through one or more transformations (e.g., modulation, amplification, truncation, etc.), to create suitable haptic feedback in various scenarios and for various purposes, such as those mentioned above and those described with respect to the user interfaces and methods discussed herein. This example of a palette of tactile outputs shows how a set of three waveforms and eight frequencies can be used to produce an array of tactile output patterns. In addition to the tactile output patterns shown in this figure, each of these tactile output patterns is optionally adjusted in amplitude by changing a gain value for the tactile output pattem, as shown, for example for FullTap 80Hz, FullTap 200Hz, MiniTap 80Hz, MiniTap 200Hz, MicroTap 80Hz, and MicroTap 200Hz in Figure 4G, which are each shown with variants having a gain of 1.0, 0.75, 0.5, and 0.25. As shown in Figure 4G, changing the gain of a tactile output pattern changes the amplitude of the pattem without changing the frequency of the pattem or changing the shape of the waveform. In some embodiments, changing the frequency of a tactile output pattern also results in a lower amplitude as some tactile output generators are limited by how much force can be applied to the moveable mass and thus higher frequency movements of the mass are constrained to lower amplitudes to ensure that the acceleration needed to create the waveform does not require force outside of an operational force range of the tactile output generator (e.g., the peak amplitudes of the FullTap at 230Hz, 270Hz, and 300Hz are lower than the amplitudes of the FullTap at 80Hz, 100Hz, 125Hz, and 200Hz).

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0070] In Figure 4F, each column shows tactile output patterns that have a particular waveform. The waveform of a tactile output pattern represents the pattem of physical displacements relative to a neutral position (e.g., x_zero) versus time that an moveable mass goes through to generate a tactile output with that tactile output pattem. For example, a first set of tactile output patterns shown in the left column in Figure 4F (e.g., tactile output patterns of a “FullTap”) each have a waveform that includes an oscillation with two complete cycles (e.g., an oscillation that starts and ends in a neutral position and crosses the neutral position three times). A second set of tactile output patterns shown in the middle column in Figure 4F (e.g., tactile output patterns of a “MiniTap”) each have a waveform that includes an oscillation that includes one complete cycle (e.g., an oscillation that starts and ends in a neutral position and crosses the neutral position one time). A third set of tactile output patterns shown in the right column in Figure 4F (e.g., tactile output patterns of a “MicroTap”) each have a waveform that includes an oscillation that include one half of a complete cycle (e.g., an oscillation that starts and ends in a neutral position and does not cross the neutral position). The waveform of a tactile output pattern also includes a start buffer and an end buffer that represent the gradual speeding up and slowing down of the moveable mass at the start and at the end of the tactile output. The example waveforms shown in Figure 4F-4G include x_min and x_max values which represent the maximum and minimum extent of movement of the moveable mass. For larger electronic devices with larger moveable masses, there may be larger or smaller minimum and maximum extents of movement of the mass. The example shown in Figures 4F-4G describes movement of a mass in 1 dimension, however similar principles would also apply to movement of a moveable mass in two or three dimensions.

[0071] As shown in Figure 4F, each tactile output pattem also has a corresponding characteristic frequency that affects the “pitch” of a haptic sensation that is felt by a user from a tactile output with that characteristic frequency. For a continuous tactile output, the characteristic frequency represents the number of cycles that are completed within a given period of time (e.g., cycles per second) by the moveable mass of the tactile output generator. For a discrete tactile output, a discrete output signal (e.g., with 0.5, 1, or 2 cycles) is generated, and the characteristic frequency value specifies how fast the moveable mass needs to move to generate a tactile output with that characteristic frequency. As shown in Figure 4F, for each type of tactile output (e.g., as defined by a respective waveform, such as

DK 2016 70725 A1

FullTap, MiniTap, or MicroTap), a higher frequency value corresponds to faster movement(s) by the moveable mass, and hence, in general, a shorter time to complete the tactile output (e.g., including the time to complete the required number of cycle(s) for the discrete tactile output, plus a start and an end buffer time). For example, a FullTap with a characteristic frequency of 80Hz takes longer to complete than FullTap with a characteristic frequency of 100Hz (e.g., 35.4ms vs. 28.3ms in Figure 4F). In addition, for a given frequency, a tactile output with more cycles in its waveform at a respective frequency takes longer to complete than a tactile output with fewer cycles its waveform at the same respective frequency. For example, a FullTap at 150Hz takes longer to complete than a MiniTap at 150Hz (e.g., 19.4ms vs. 12.8ms), and a MiniTap at 150Hz takes longer to complete than a MicroTap at 150Hz (e.g., 12.8ms vs. 9.4ms). However, for tactile output patterns with different frequencies this rule may not apply (e.g., tactile outputs with more cycles but a higher frequency may take a shorter amount of time to complete than tactile outputs with fewer cycles but a lower frequency, and vice versa). For example, at 300Hz, a FullTap takes as long as a MiniTap (e.g., 9.9 ms).

[0072] As shown in Figure 4F, a tactile output pattern also has a characteristic amplitude that affects the amount of energy that is contained in a tactile signal, or a “strength” of a haptic sensation that may be felt by a user through a tactile output with that characteristic amplitude. In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of a tactile output pattern refers to an absolute or normalized value that represents the maximum displacement of the moveable mass from a neutral position when generating the tactile output. In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of a tactile output pattern is adjustable, e.g., by a fixed or dynamically determined gain factor (e.g., a value between 0 and 1), in accordance with various conditions (e.g., customized based on user interface contexts and behaviors) and/or preconfigured metrics (e.g., input-based metrics, and/or user-interface-based metrics). In some embodiments, an input-based metric (e.g., an intensity-change metric or an input-speed metric) measures a characteristic of an input (e.g., a rate of change of a characteristic intensity of a contact in a press input or a rate of movement of the contact across a touch-sensitive surface) during the input that triggers generation of a tactile output. In some embodiments, a user-interface-based metric (e.g., a speed-across-boundary metric) measures a characteristic of a user interface element (e.g., a speed of movement of the element across a hidden or visible boundary in a user interface)

DK 2016 70725 A1 during the user interface change that triggers generation of the tactile output. In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of a tactile output pattern may be modulated by an “envelope” and the peaks of adjacent cycles may have different amplitudes, where one of the waveforms shown above is further modified by multiplication by an envelope parameter that changes over time (e.g., from 0 to 1) to gradually adjust amplitude of portions of the tactile output over time as the tactile output is being generated.

[0073] Although specific frequencies, amplitudes, and waveforms are represented in the sample tactile output patterns in Figure 4F for illustrative purposes, tactile output patterns with other frequencies, amplitudes, and waveforms may be used for similar purposes. For example, waveforms that have between 0.5 to 4 cycles can be used. Other frequencies in the range of 60Hz-400Hz may be used as well. Table 1 provides examples of particular haptic feedback behaviors, configurations, and examples of their use.

Table 1

Behavior Configuration	Feedback Configuration	Examples
User Interface	Haptics
Retarget Default	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain: 0.4 Minimum Interval: 0.05	Drag calendar event across day boundary
Retarget in force-press quick action menu
Sliding over origin point in a scrubber
Reaching 0 degrees when cropping/straightening
Rearranging a list when items snap together
Retarget Strong	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain: 0.5 Minimum Interval: 0.05	Retarget in A-Z scrubber
Retarget Picker	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain: 0.4 Minimum Interval: 0.05	Spinning a wheel in the wheels of time user interface


Impact Default	MicroTap	Changing scrubbing speed when adjusting a slider

DK 2016 70725 A1

Behavior Configuration	Feedback Configuration	Examples
	Medium (150Hz) Gain max: 0.8 Gain min: 0.0	Creating a new calendar event by tapping and holding
Activating a toggle switch (changing the switch from on to off or off to on)
Reaching a predefined orientation on a compass (e.g., every 45 degrees from North)
Reaching a level state (e.g., 0 degrees tilt in any axis for 0.5 seconds)
Dropping a pin in a map
Sending or receiving a message with an emphasis animation (e.g., “slam” effect)
Sending or receiving an acknowledgment of a message
Snapping a ruler to different orientations (e.g., every 45 degrees)
Crossing over a suggested photo while scrubbing through a burst of photos
Crossing over a detent in a scrubber (e.g., text size, haptic strength, display brightness, display color temperature)
Transaction failure notification (ApplePay Failure)
Impact Light	MicroTap Medium (150Hz) Gain max: 0.6 Gain min: 0.0	Picking up an existing item (e.g., a calendar event, a favorite in web browser)
Moving a time selector over a minor division of time (e.g., 15 min) in sleep alarm

Impact Strong	MicroTap Medium (150Hz) Gain max: 1.0 Gain min: 0.0	Moving a time selector over a major division of time (e.g., 1 hour) in sleep alarm
Edge Scrubber	MicroTap Medium (150Hz) Gain max: 0.6 Gain min: 0.3	Dragging a brightness scrubber to an edge of the scrubber
Dragging a volume scrubber to an edge of the scrubber

DK 2016 70725 A1

Behavior Configuration	Feedback Configuration	Examples
Edge Zoom	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain: 0.6	Reaching maximum zoom level when zooming into a photo
Re-centering a map
Drag Default	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain Pickup: 1.0 Gain Drop: 0.6	Pickup and drop an event in calendar


Drag Snapping	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain Pickup: 1.0 Gain Drop: 0.6 Gain Snap: 1.0	Rearrange lists in weather, contacts, music, etc.
States Swipe Action	Swipe in: MiniTap High (270Hz) Gain: 1.0 Swipe out: MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain: 0.55	Swipe to delete a mail message or conversation
Swipe to mark a mail message as read/unread in mail
Swipe to delete a table row (e.g., a document in a document creation/viewing application, a note in a notes application, a location in a weather application, a podcast in a podcast application, a song in a playlist in a music application, a voice memo in a voice recording application
Swipe to delete a message while displaying a pressure-triggered preview
Swipe to mark a message as read/unread while displaying a pressure-triggered preview
Swipe to delete a news article
Swipe to favorite/love a news article
Button Default	MicroTap High (270Hz) Gain: 0.9	Reply to message/conversation
Adding a bookmark in an electronic book reader application
Activating a virtual assistant
Starting to record a voice memo
Stopping recording a voice memo

DK 2016 70725 A1

Behavior Configuration	Feedback Configuration	Examples
Button Destructive	MiniTap Low (100Hz) Feedback Intensity: 0.8	Delete message/conversation
Event Success	FullTap Medium (200Hz) Gain: 0.7 MiniTap High (270Hz) Gain: 1.0	Confirmation that a payment has been made
Alert that authentication is needed to make a payment (e.g., biometric authentication or passcode authentication)
Adding a payment account to an electronic wallet application
Event Error	MiniTap High (270Hz) Gain: 0.85 Gain: 0.75 FullTap Medium (200Hz) Gain: 0.65 FullTap Low (150Hz) Gain: 0.75	Failure to process a payment transaction
Failure to authenticate a fingerprint detected on a fingerprint sensor
Incorrect passcode/password entered in a pas scode/pas sword entry UI
Event Warning	FullTap High (300Hz) Gain: 0.9 FullTap Custom (270Hz) Gain: 0.9	Shake to undo
Force Press
States Preview	MicroTap Custom (200Hz) Gain: 1.0	Peek/Preview (e.g., peek at a mail message)

DK 2016 70725 A1

Behavior Configuration	Feedback Configuration	Examples
States Preview	FullTap Custom (150Hz) Gain: 1.0	Pop/Commit (e.g., pop into full mail message)
States Preview	MicroTap Custom (200Hz) Gain: 1.0	Unavailable (e.g., press hard on an app icon that doesn’t have any associated quick actions)
System Haptics
Device Locked	MicroTap Medium (150Hz) Gain: 1.0 MiniTap Medium (150Hz) Gain: 1.0	Press power button once to lock device
Vibe on Attach	Vibe at 150Hz that gradually increases or decreases in amplitude	Attach device to power source
Ringtones & Alerts	Custom tactile output using one or more of: Vibe 150Hz MicroTap 150Hz MiniTap 150Hz FullTap 150Hz	Receive phone call or text message
Solid-State Home Button
1 (“Tick”)	MiniTap 230Hz Gain: 1.0	Press home button with click option 1 selected

DK 2016 70725 A1

Behavior Configuration	Feedback Configuration	Examples
2 (“Tak”)	MiniTap 270Hz Gain: 1.0	Press home button with click option 2 selected
3 (“Tock”)	MiniTap 300Hz Gain: 1.0	Press home button with click option 3 selected

[0074] The examples shown above in Table 1 are intended to illustrate a range of circumstances in which tactile outputs can be generated for different inputs and events. Table 1 should not be taken as a requirement that a device respond to each of the listed inputs or events with the indicated tactile output. Rather, Table 1 is intended to illustrate how tactile outputs vary and/or are similar for different inputs and/or events (e.g., based on the tactile output pattern, frequency, gain, etc.). For example Table 1 shows how an “event success” tactile output varies from an “event failure” tactile output and how a retarget tactile output differs from an impact tactile output.

[0075] It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in Figure IA are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.

[0076] Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory 102 by other components of device 100, such as CPU(s) 120 and the peripherals interface 118, is, optionally, controlled by memory controller 122.

[0077] Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s) 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0078] In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU(s) 120, and memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.

[0079] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (FAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPA), long term evolution (FTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.1 lac, IEEE 802.1 lax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11η), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Feveraging Extensions (SIMPFE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.

[0080] Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the

DK 2016 70725 A1 electrical signal to speaker 111. Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, Figure 2A). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).

[0081] I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input or control devices 116, with peripherals interface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices 116.

The other input or control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208, Figure 2A) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206, Figure 2A).

[0082] Touch-sensitive display system 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive display system 112. Touch-sensitive display system 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., a graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the

DK 2016 70725 A1 graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, hyperlink, or other user interface control.

[0083] Touch-sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touchsensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112. In some embodiments, a point of contact between touch-sensitive display system 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus.

[0084] Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system 112. In some embodiments, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0085] Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater). The user optionally makes contact with touchsensitive display system 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device

DK 2016 70725 A1 translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.

[0086] In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system 112 or an extension of the touchsensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

[0087] Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a lightemitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.

[0088] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164. Figure

IA shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller 158 in FO subsystem 106. Optical sensor(s) 164 optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) photo transistors. Optical sensor(s) 164 receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor(s) 164 optionally capture still images and/or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touchsensitive display system 112 on the front of the device, so that the touch screen is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user's image is obtained (e.g., for selfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen, etc.).

[0089] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors

165. Figure IA shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with intensity sensor controller 159 in FO subsystem 106. Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric

DK 2016 70725 A1 force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touchsensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-screen display system 112 which is located on the front of device 100.

[0090] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166.

Figure 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled with peripherals interface 118. Alternately, proximity sensor 166 is coupled with input controller 160 in FO subsystem 106. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

[0091] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators

167. Figure 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled with haptic feedback controller 161 in FO subsystem 106. In some embodiments, tactile output generator(s) 167 optionally include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system 112, which is located on the front of device 100.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [0092] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. Figure

1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled with peripherals interface 118. Alternately, accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled with an input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100.

[0093] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, communication module (or set of instructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130, graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, haptic feedback module (or set of instructions) 133, text input module (or set of instructions) 134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 stores device/global internal state 157, as shown in Figures 1A and 3. Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system 112; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and other input or control devices 116; and location and/or positional information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude.

[0094] Operating system 126 (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X,

WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

[0095] Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other

DK 2016 70725 A1 devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0096] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch’Vmultiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.

[0097] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user.

Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. Lor example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the

DK 2016 70725 A1 touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. Similarly, tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus by detecting a particular contact pattem for the stylus.

[0098] In some embodiments, detecting a finger tap gesture (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system 112) depends on the length of time between detecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event, but is independent of the intensity of the finger contact between detecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected in accordance with a determination that the length of time between the finger-down event and the finger-up event is less than a predetermined value (e.g., less than 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 or 0.5 seconds), independent of whether the intensity of the finger contact during the tap meets a given intensity threshold (greater than a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold), such as a light press or deep press intensity threshold. Thus, a finger tap gesture can satisfy input criteria that are configured to be met even when the characteristic intensity of a contact does not satisfy a given intensity threshold. For clarity, the finger contact in a tap gesture typically needs to satisfy a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold, below which the contact is not detected, in order for the finger-down event to be detected. A similar analysis applies to detecting a tap gesture by a stylus or other contact. In cases where the device is configured to detect a finger or stylus contact hovering over a touch sensitive surface, the nominal contact-detection intensity threshold optionally does not correspond to physical contact between the finger or stylus and the touch sensitive surface.

[0099] The same concepts apply in an analogous manner to other types of gestures.

For example, a swipe gesture, a pinch gesture, a depinch gesture, and/or a long press gesture are optionally detected (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system 112) based on the satisfaction of criteria that are independent of intensities of contacts included in the gesture. For example., a swipe gesture is detected based on an amount of movement of one or more contacts; a pinch gesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts towards each other; a depinch gesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts away from each other; and a long press gesture is detected based on a duration of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface with less than a threshold amount of movement. As such, the statement that gesture recognition criteria are configured to be met when a contact in a

DK 2016 70725 A1 gesture has an intensity below a respective intensity threshold means that the gesture recognition criteria are capable of being satisfied even if the contact(s) in the gesture do not reach the respective intensity threshold. It should be understood, however, that this statement does not preclude the gesture recognition criteria from being satisfied in circumstances where one or more of the contacts in the gesture do reach or exceed the respective intensity threshold. For example, a tap gesture is configured to be detected if the finger-down and finger-up event are detected within a predefined time period, without regard to whether the contact is above or below the respective intensity threshold during the predefined time period, and a swipe gesture is configured to be detected if the contact movement is greater than a predefined magnitude, even if the contact is above the respective intensity threshold at the end of the contact movement.

[00100] Contact intensity thresholds, duration thresholds, and movement thresholds are, in some circumstances, combined in a variety of different combinations in order to create heuristics for distinguishing two or more different gestures directed to the same input element or region so that multiple different interactions with the same input element are enabled to provide a richer set of user interactions and responses. The statement that a particular set of gesture recognition criteria are configured to be met when a contact in a gesture has an intensity below a respective intensity threshold does not preclude the concurrent evaluation of other intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria to identify other gestures that do have a criteria that is met when a gesture includes a contact with an intensity above the respective intensity threshold. For example, in some circumstances, first gesture recognition criteria for a first gesture - which are configured to be met when a gesture has an intensity below a respective intensity threshold - are in competition with second gesture recognition criteria for a second gesture - which are dependent on the gesture reaching the respective intensity threshold. In such competitions, the gesture is, optionally, not recognized as meeting the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture if the second gesture recognition criteria for the second gesture are met first. For example, if a contact reaches the respective intensity threshold before the contact moves by a predefined amount of movement, a deep press gesture is detected rather than a swipe gesture. Conversely, if the contact moves by the predefined amount of movement before the contact reaches the respective intensity threshold, a swipe gesture is detected rather than a deep press gesture. Even in such circumstances, the first gesture recognition criteria for the

DK 2016 70725 A1 first gesture are still configured to be met when a contact in the gesture has an intensity below the respective intensity because if the contact stayed below the respective intensity threshold until an end of the gesture (e.g., a swipe gesture with a contact that does not increase to an intensity above the respective intensity threshold), the gesture would have been recognized by the first gesture recognition criteria as a swipe gesture. As such, particular gesture recognition criteria that are configured to be met when an intensity of a contact remains below a respective intensity threshold will (A) in some circumstances ignore the intensity of the contact with respect to the intensity threshold (e.g. for a tap gesture) and/or (B) in some circumstances still be dependent on the intensity of the contact with respect to the intensity threshold in the sense that the particular gesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a long press gesture) will fail if a competing set of intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a deep press gesture) recognize an input as corresponding to an intensity-dependent gesture before the particular gesture recognition criteria recognize a gesture corresponding to the input (e.g., for a long press gesture that is competing with a deep press gesture for recognition).

[00101] Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and the like.

[00102] In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156.

[00103] Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions (e.g., instructions used by haptic feedback controller 161) to produce tactile outputs using tactile output generator(s) 167 at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00104] Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application that needs text input).

[00105] GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing, to camera 143 as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide locationbased services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

[00106] Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

• contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);

• telephone module 138;

• video conferencing module 139;

• e-mail client module 140;

• instant messaging (IM) module 141;

• workout support module 142;

• camera module 143 for still and/or video images;

• image management module 144;

• browser module 147;

• calendar module 148;

• widget modules 149, which optionally include one or more of: weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets 149-6;

• widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;

• search module 151;

• video and music player module 152, which is, optionally, made up of a video player module and a music player module;

DK 2016 70725 A1 • notes module 153;

• map module 154; and/or • online video module 155.

[00107] Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.

[00108] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller

156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 includes executable instructions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 138, video conference 139, e-mail 140, or IM 141; and so forth.

[00109] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies.

[00110] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contact list 137, and telephone module 138, videoconferencing module

DK 2016 70725 A1

139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.

[00111] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144, e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143.

[00112] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPFE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internetbased instant messages), to receive instant messages and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPFE, APNs, or IMPS).

[00113] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and music player module 146, workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data.

[00114] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable

DK 2016 70725 A1 instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video from memory 102.

[00115] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.

[00116] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

[00117] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.

[00118] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).

[00119] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creator module 150 includes executable

DK 2016 70725 A1 instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

[00120] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

[00121] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touchsensitive display system 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

[00122] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller

156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.

[00123] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154 includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

[00124] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), playback (e.g., on the touch screen

DK 2016 70725 A1

112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than e-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video.

[00125] Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[00126] In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.

[00127] The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100. In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.

[00128] Figure IB is a block diagram illustrating example components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (in Figures 1A) or 370 (Figure 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 136, 137-155, 380-390).

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00129] Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.

[00130] In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

[00131] Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touchsensitive display system 112, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from FO subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110). Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from FO subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display system 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

[00132] In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripheral interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).

[00133] In some embodiments, event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173.

[00134] Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touch46

DK 2016 70725 A1 sensitive display system 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.

[00135] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.

[00136] Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to subevents of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.

[00137] Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.

[00138] Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to

DK 2016 70725 A1 an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module 182.

[00139] In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.

[00140] In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface. Each application view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177 or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 includes one or more respective event handlers 190. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.

[00141] A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event sorter 170, and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).

[00142] Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a

DK 2016 70725 A1 touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event.

In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.

[00143] Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event 187 include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touchsensitive display system 112, and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.

[00144] In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display system 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three userinterface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00145] In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event 187 also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type.

[00146] When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of subevents do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process subevents of an ongoing touch-based gesture.

[00147] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

[00148] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.

[00149] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00150] In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module 145. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touchsensitive display.

[00151] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.

[00152] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.

[00153] Figure 1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, I/O subsystem 106 (e.g., haptic feedback controller 161 (Figure IA) and/or other input controller(s) 160 (Figure IA)) includes at least some of the example components shown in Figure 1C. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118 includes at least some of the example components shown in Figure 1C.

[00154] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes haptic feedback module 133. In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 aggregates and combines tactile outputs for user interface feedback from software applications on the electronic device (e.g., feedback that is responsive to user inputs that correspond to displayed user

DK 2016 70725 A1 interfaces and alerts and other notifications that indicate the performance of operations or occurrence of events in user interfaces of the electronic device). Haptic feedback module 133 includes one or more of: waveform module 123 (for providing waveforms used for generating tactile outputs), mixer 125 (for mixing waveforms, such as waveforms in different channels), compressor 127 (for reducing or compressing a dynamic range of the waveforms), low-pass filter 129 (for filtering out high frequency signal components in the waveforms), and thermal controller 131 (for adjusting the waveforms in accordance with thermal conditions). In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 is included in haptic feedback controller 161 (Figure IA). In some embodiments, a separate unit of haptic feedback module 133 (or a separate implementation of haptic feedback module 133) is also included in an audio controller (e.g., audio circuitry 110, Figure IA) and used for generating audio signals. In some embodiments, a single haptic feedback module 133 is used for generating audio signals and generating waveforms for tactile outputs.

[00155] In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 also includes trigger module 121 (e.g., a software application, operating system, or other software module that determines a tactile output is to be generated and initiates the process for generating the corresponding tactile output). In some embodiments, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals for initiating generation of waveforms (e.g., by waveform module 123). For example, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals based on preset timing criteria. In some embodiments, trigger module 121 receives trigger signals from outside haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., in some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 receives trigger signals from hardware input processing module 146 located outside haptic feedback module 133) and relays the trigger signals to other components within haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., waveform module 123) or software applications that trigger operations (e.g., with trigger module 121) based on activation of a user interface element (e.g., an application icon or an affordance within an application) or a hardware input device (e.g., a home button). In some embodiments, trigger module 121 also receives tactile feedback generation instructions (e.g., from haptic feedback module 133, Figures IA and 3). In some embodiments, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals in response to haptic feedback module 133 (or trigger module 121 in haptic feedback module 133) receiving tactile feedback instructions (e.g., from haptic feedback module 133, Figures IA and 3).

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00156] Waveform module 123 receives trigger signals (e.g., from trigger module 121) as an input, and in response to receiving trigger signals, provides waveforms for generation of one or more tactile outputs (e.g., waveforms selected from a predefined set of waveforms designated for use by waveform module 123, such as the waveforms described in greater detail below with reference to Figures 4F-4G).

[00157] Mixer 125 receives waveforms (e.g., from waveform module 123) as an input, and mixes together the waveforms. For example, when mixer 125 receives two or more waveforms (e.g., a first waveform in a first channel and a second waveform that at least partially overlaps with the first waveform in a second channel) mixer 125 outputs a combined waveform that corresponds to a sum of the two or more waveforms. In some embodiments, mixer 125 also modifies one or more waveforms of the two or more waveforms to emphasize particular waveform(s) over the rest of the two or more waveforms (e.g., by increasing a scale of the particular waveform(s) and/or decreasing a scale of the rest of the waveforms). In some circumstances, mixer 125 selects one or more waveforms to remove from the combined waveform (e.g., the waveform from the oldest source is dropped when there are waveforms from more than three sources that have been requested to be output concurrently by tactile output generator 167) [00158] Compressor 127 receives waveforms (e.g., a combined waveform from mixer 125) as an input, and modifies the waveforms. In some embodiments, compressor 127 reduces the waveforms (e.g., in accordance with physical specifications of tactile output generators 167 (Figure IA) or 357 (Figure 3)) so that tactile outputs corresponding to the waveforms are reduced. In some embodiments, compressor 127 limits the waveforms, such as by enforcing a predefined maximum amplitude for the waveforms. For example, compressor 127 reduces amplitudes of portions of waveforms that exceed a predefined amplitude threshold while maintaining amplitudes of portions of waveforms that do not exceed the predefined amplitude threshold. In some embodiments, compressor 127 reduces a dynamic range of the waveforms. In some embodiments, compressor 127 dynamically reduces the dynamic range of the waveforms so that the combined waveforms remain within performance specifications of the tactile output generator 167 (e.g., force and/or moveable mass displacement limits).

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00159] Low-pass filter 129 receives waveforms (e.g., compressed waveforms from compressor 127) as an input, and filters (e.g., smooths) the waveforms (e.g., removes or reduces high frequency signal components in the waveforms). For example, in some instances, compressor 127 includes, in compressed waveforms, extraneous signals (e.g., high frequency signal components) that interfere with the generation of tactile outputs and/or exceed performance specifications of tactile output generator 167 when the tactile outputs are generated in accordance with the compressed waveforms. Low-pass filter 129 reduces or removes such extraneous signals in the waveforms.

[00160] Thermal controller 131 receives waveforms (e.g., filtered waveforms from low-pass filter 129) as an input, and adjusts the waveforms in accordance with thermal conditions of device 100 (e.g., based on internal temperatures detected within device 100, such as the temperature of haptic feedback controller 161, and/or external temperatures detected by device 100). For example, in some cases, the output of haptic feedback controller 161 varies depending on the temperature (e.g. haptic feedback controller 161, in response to receiving same waveforms, generates a first tactile output when haptic feedback controller 161 is at a first temperature and generates a second tactile output when haptic feedback controller 161 is at a second temperature that is distinct from the first temperature). For example, the magnitude (or the amplitude) of the tactile outputs may vary depending on the temperature. To reduce the effect of the temperature variations, the waveforms are modified (e.g., an amplitude of the waveforms is increased or decreased based on the temperature).

[00161] In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., trigger module 121) is coupled to hardware input processing module 146. In some embodiments, other input controller(s) 160 in Figure 1A includes hardware input processing module 146. In some embodiments, hardware input processing module 146 receives inputs from hardware input device 145 (e.g., other input or control devices 116 in Figure 1A, such as a home button). In some embodiments, hardware input device 145 is any input device described herein, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 (Figure 1A), keyboard/mouse 350 (Figure 3), touchpad 355 (Figure 3), one of other input or control devices 116 (Figure 1A), or an intensitysensitive home button (e.g., as shown in Figure 2B or a home button with a mechanical actuator as illustrated in Figure 2C). In some embodiments, hardware input device 145 consists of an intensity-sensitive home button (e.g., as shown in Figure 2B or a home button

DK 2016 70725 A1 with a mechanical actuator as illustrated in Figure 2C), and not touch-sensitive display system 112 (Figure IA), keyboard/mouse 350 (Figure 3), or touchpad 355 (Figure 3). In some embodiments, in response to inputs from hardware input device 145, hardware input processing module 146 provides one or more trigger signals to haptic feedback module 133 to indicate that a user input satisfying predefined input criteria, such as an input corresponding to a “click” of a home button (e.g., a “down click” or an “up click”), has been detected. In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 provides waveforms that correspond to the “click” of a home button in response to the input corresponding to the “click” of a home button, simulating a haptic feedback of pressing a physical home button.

[00162] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes haptic feedback controller 161 (e.g., haptic feedback controller 161 in Figure IA), which controls the generation of tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 is coupled to a plurality of tactile output generators, and selects one or more tactile output generators of the plurality of tactile output generators and sends waveforms to the selected one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 coordinates tactile output requests that correspond to activation of hardware input device 145 and tactile output requests that correspond to software events (e.g., tactile output requests from haptic feedback module 133) and modifies one or more waveforms of the two or more waveforms to emphasize particular waveform(s) over the rest of the two or more waveforms (e.g., by increasing a scale of the particular waveform(s) and/or decreasing a scale of the rest of the waveforms, such as to prioritize tactile outputs that correspond to activations of hardware input device 145 over tactile outputs that correspond to software events).

[00163] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 1C, an output of haptic feedback controller 161 is coupled to audio circuitry of device 100 (e.g., audio circuitry 110, Figure IA), and provides audio signals to audio circuitry of device 100. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 provides both waveforms used for generating tactile outputs and audio signals used for providing audio outputs in conjunction with generation of the tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 modifies audio signals and/or waveforms (used for generating tactile outputs) so that the audio outputs and the tactile outputs are synchronized (e.g., by delaying the audio signals and/or waveforms). In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 includes a digital-to-analog converter

DK 2016 70725 A1 used for converting digital waveforms into analog signals, which are received by amplifier 163 and/or tactile output generator 167.

[00164] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes amplifier 163. In some embodiments, amplifier 163 receives waveforms (e.g., from haptic feedback controller 161) and amplifies the waveforms prior to sending the amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167 (e.g., any of tactile output generators 167 (Figure IA) or 357 (Figure 3)). For example, amplifier 163 amplifies the received waveforms to signal levels that are in accordance with physical specifications of tactile output generator 167 (e.g., to a voltage and/or a current required by tactile output generator 167 for generating tactile outputs so that the signals sent to tactile output generator 167 produce tactile outputs that correspond to the waveforms received from haptic feedback controller 161) and sends the amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167. In response, tactile output generator 167 generates tactile outputs (e.g., by shifting a moveable mass back and forth in one or more dimensions relative to a neutral position of the moveable mass).

[00165] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes sensor 169, which is coupled to tactile output generator 167. Sensor 169 detects states or state changes (e.g., mechanical position, physical displacement, and/or movement) of tactile output generator 167 or one or more components of tactile output generator 167 (e.g., one or more moving parts, such as a membrane, used to generate tactile outputs). In some embodiments, sensor 169 is a magnetic field sensor (e.g., a Hall effect sensor) or other displacement and/or movement sensor. In some embodiments, sensor 169 provides information (e.g., a position, a displacement, and/or a movement of one or more parts in tactile output generator 167) to haptic feedback controller 161 and, in accordance with the information provided by sensor 169 about the state of tactile output generator 167, haptic feedback controller 161 adjusts the waveforms output from haptic feedback controller 161 (e.g., waveforms sent to tactile output generator 167, optionally via amplifier 163).

[00166] Figures ID-IE are block diagrams illustrating application-independent software modules in accordance with some embodiments.

[00167] Figure ID illustrates that haptic feedback module 133 receives information related to user interactions with device 100. Haptic feedback module 133, in response to receiving the information, generates and provides tactile feedback generation instructions to

DK 2016 70725 A1 haptic feedback controller 161, which in turn sends instructions to tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 corresponds to a synthesizer illustrated in Appendix A and/or an AVHapticPIayer in Appendix B.

[00168] In some embodiments, applications (e.g., application 1 (136-1)) send information (e.g., information 272) related to user interactions with device 100 to application-independent software module 260, which processes the information and sends the processed information (e.g., information 274, which is distinct from information 272) to haptic feedback module 133. In some embodiments, applications correspond to Client App illustrated in Appendices A and B.

[00169] In some embodiments, application-independent software module 260 is distinct and separate from applications, as shown in Figure ID. In some embodiments, application-independent software module 260 includes the UIKit, and more particularly, the UiFeedbackGenerator in the UIKit, illustrated in Appendices A and B.

[00170] In some embodiments, applications use various functions and objects described in Appendices A and B to communicate with application-independent software module 260.

[00171] Figure IE is similar to Figure ID, except that each of application 1 (136-1, such as an e-mail client application) and application 2 (136-2, such as a browser application) includes a distinct instance (e.g., a distinct copy) of application-independent software module 260. In addition, each of the applications (e.g., application 1 and application 2) includes an application core that is specific to the application (e.g., application 1 (136-1) includes application core 1 (270-1) and/or application 2 (136-2) includes application core 2 (270-2)). For example, application core 1 (270-1) includes instructions for performing operations specific to application 1 (136-1) (e.g., retrieving e-mails from one or more e-mail servers) and application core 2 (260-2) includes instructions for performing operations specific to application 2 (136-2) (e.g., bookmarking a web page).

[00172] Figure IE also illustrates that an application core (e.g., application core 1 (270-1) receives user interaction models from application independent software module 260 or an instance of application independent software module 260. In some embodiments, the user interaction models include information identifying a plurality of user interface element

DK 2016 70725 A1 types 272 (e.g., slider objects 272-1, switch objects 272-2, etc.) and associated user interface responses 274. In some embodiments, the user interface responses include information identifying tactile outputs to be generated in conjunction with user interaction with corresponding user interface elements (e.g., slider objects represented by slider object type 272-1 are associated with tactile output 274-1, and switch objects represented by switch object type 272-2 are associated with tactile output 274-2). For example, tactile output 2741 defines which tactile outputs are to be generated when a corresponding slider thumb is moved and/or when the slider thumb reaches an end of the slider, and tactile output 274-2 defines which tactile outputs are to be generated when a corresponding switch object is turned on and/or off.

[00173] In some embodiments, user interaction models are predefined classes (e.g., the UlView class defining an area on a display and the interfaces for managing the content in that area). At run time, a view object is prepared (e.g., an instance of the UlView class is created) to handle the rendering of content in a corresponding area and also handle interactions with the content. In some embodiments, the UlView class includes one or more subclasses, such as a UlControl class configured for implementing visual elements that are used for specific actions, a UITableView class configured for displaying and editing hierarchical lists of information, a UIDatePicker class configured for displaying a wheel of time to allow a user to select dates and/or times, a UIS lider class configured for selecting a single value from a continuous range of values, and a UlScrollView class configured for displaying content that is larger than a corresponding display area. In some embodiments, the UITableView class, the UIDatePicker class, the UlSlider class, and the UlScrollView class are subclasses of the UlControl class.

[00174] Figure 2A illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure 1A) in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200. In these embodiments, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from

DK 2016 70725 A1 left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 100. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

[00175] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204. As described previously, menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch-screen display.

[00176] In some embodiments, device 100 includes the touch-screen display, menu button 204 (sometimes called home button 204), push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot 210, head set jack 212, and docking/charging external port 124. Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In some embodiments, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive display system 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.

[00177] In some embodiments, an application (e.g., an application core of the application, such as application core 1 (270-1)) generates a user interface by populating a user interface element (e.g., a slider) identified in the user interaction models with content provided by the application core (e.g., application core 1 (270-1) provides a range of the slider element and locations and/or values of major and minor tick marks).

[00178] In some embodiments, the application sends the user interface to graphics module 132 for display.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00179] In some embodiments, the application receives information representing user interactions with device 100 from contact/motion module 130. In some embodiments, the application relays the information representing user interactions with device 100 to an application-independent software module or an instance thereof (e.g., 260-1), and the application-independent software module send the information or a subset thereof to haptic feedback module 133 for generating tactile outputs. In some embodiments, the application also sends information identifying one or more dimensions of a selected user interface. In some embodiments, the information representing user interactions with device 100 includes a magnitude (e.g., a speed) and/or a location of a user input.

[00180] In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 receives the information representing user interactions with device 100 directly from contact/motion module 130 (e.g., without going through the application).

[00181] Figure 3 is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPU’s) 310, one or more network or other communications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 300 includes input/output (FO) interface 330 comprising display 340, which is typically a touchscreen display. FO interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to Figure 1A), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to Figure 1A). Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state

DK 2016 70725 A1 storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (Figure IA), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, website creation module 386, disk authoring module 388, and/or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (Figure IA) optionally does not store these modules.

[00182] Each of the above identified elements in Figure 3 are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[00183] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (UI) that are, optionally, implemented on portable multifunction device 100.

[00184] Figure 4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

• Signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;

• Time 404;

• a Bluetooth indicator;

• Battery status indicator 406;

DK 2016 70725 A1 • Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:

o Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;

o Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread e-mails;

o Icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152, labeled “iPod;” and • Icons for other applications, such as:

o Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled “Messages;” o Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;” o Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Maps;” o Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;” o Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;” o Icon 442 for workout support module 142, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 446 for a settings application or module, which provides access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136.

[00185] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in Figure 4A are merely examples. For example, in some embodiments, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a

DK 2016 70725 A1 name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.

[00186] Figure 4B illustrates an example user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355, Figure 3) that is separate from the display 450. Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 357) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 359 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.

[00187] Although many of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touchsensitive surface (e.g., 451 in Figure 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in Figure 4B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in Figure 4B) on the display (e.g., 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in Figure 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in Figure 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movements thereoD detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in Figure 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 450 in Figure 4B) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.

[00188] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a stylus input). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple finger contacts, or a combination of finger contacts and stylus inputs are used simultaneously.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00189] As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touchsensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touchsensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).

[00190] In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a

DK 2016 70725 A1 subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).

[00191] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value produced by low-pass filtering the intensity of the contact over a predefined period or starting at a predefined time, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold.

In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first intensity threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that

DK 2016 70725 A1 exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

[00192] In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.

[00193] The user interface figures described herein optionally include various intensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold ITo, a light press intensity threshold ITi , a deep press intensity threshold ITd (e.g., that is at least initially higher than ITl), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold ITh that is lower than ITl)). This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a

DK 2016 70725 A1 trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold ITo below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.

[00194] In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time is typically less than 200 ms (milliseconds) in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental recognition of deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-based criteria.

[00195] In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Example factors are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00196] For example, Figure 4C illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold 480 that changes over time based in part on the intensity of touch input 476 over time. Dynamic intensity threshold 480 is a sum of two components, first component 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time pi from when touch input 476 is initially detected, and second component 478 that trails the intensity of touch input 476 over time. The initial high intensity threshold of first component 474 reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response if touch input 476 provides sufficient intensity. Second component 478 reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input. In some embodiments, when touch input 476 satisfies dynamic intensity threshold 480 (e.g., at point 481 in Figure 4C), the “deep press” response is triggered.

[00197] Figure 4D illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 486 (e.g., intensity threshold Id). Figure 4D also illustrates two other intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold Ih and a second intensity threshold II. In Figure 4D, although touch input 484 satisfies the first intensity threshold Ih and the second intensity threshold II prior to time p2, no response is provided until delay time p2 has elapsed at time 482. Also in Figure 4D, dynamic intensity threshold 486 decays over time, with the decay starting at time 488 after a predefined delay time pi has elapsed from time 482 (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold II was triggered). This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold Id immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold Ih or the second intensity threshold II.

[00198] Figure 4E illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (e.g., intensity threshold Id). In Figure 4E, a response associated with the intensity threshold II is triggered after the delay time p2 has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. Concurrently, dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after the predefined delay time pi has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. So a decrease in intensity of touch input 490 after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold II, followed by an increase in the intensity of touch input 490, without releasing touch input 490, can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold Id (e.g., at time 494) even when

DK 2016 70725 A1 the intensity of touch input 490 is below another intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold II.

[00199] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold ITl to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold ITl and the deep press intensity threshold ITd is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold ITd to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold ITd is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold ΓΓο to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold ΓΓο and the light press intensity threshold ITl is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contactdetection intensity threshold ITo to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold ITo is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touchsurface. In some embodiments ITo is zero. In some embodiments, ΓΓο is greater than zero. In some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact.

[00200] In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the

DK 2016 70725 A1 respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input).

[00201] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the pressinput intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).

[00202] For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. As

DK 2016 70725 A1 described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of these responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and a second intensity threshold being met).

[00203] Although only specific frequencies, amplitudes, and waveforms are represented in the sample tactile output patterns in Figure 4F for illustrative purposes, tactile output patterns with other frequencies, amplitudes, and waveforms may be used for similar purposes. For example, waveforms that have between 0.5 to 4 cycles can be used. Other frequencies in the range of 60Hz-400Hz may be used as well.

USER INTERFACES AND ASSOCIATED PROCESSES [00204] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that may be implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100 or device 300, with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.

[00205] Figures 5A-5KKK illustrate example user interfaces and associated tactile outputs in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 6A-6D, 8A8D, 10A-10D, 12A-12D, 14A-14B, 16A-16D, 18A-18C, and20A-20B. For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system 112. However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 and a separate touchsensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display 450, along with a focus selector.

[00206] Figures 5A-5H illustrate a user interface for displaying control settings for tactile outputs and audio outputs, in accordance with some embodiments. For ease of explanation, in the example shown in Figures 5A-5H, user interface 500 illustrates a tactile output setting and two audio output settings in the same user interface. In other embodiments, tactile output settings (e.g., including the tactile output setting shown in user interface 500) may be presented instead in one or more user interfaces separate from user interface(s) used for presenting audio settings (e.g., the audio output settings shown in user

DK 2016 70725 A1 interface 500). Figures 5A-5H illustrate that user interface 500 is displayed on touch screen 112 of portable multifunction device 100.

[00207] Figure 5A illustrates that user interface 500 includes a slider vibration control region for controlling a slider vibration setting, indicated by label 501 “Slider Vibration” and corresponding switch object 502. Switch object 502 controls a state of the slider vibration setting. Figure 5A illustrates that switch object 502 is initially at the left position (e.g., corresponding to an “off’ state of the slider vibration setting).

[00208] User interface 500 in Figure 5A also includes an audio volume control region for controlling an audio volume level, indicated by the label “Volume” and corresponding volume slider 504 set to an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position 505. In addition, user interface 500 includes an audio balance control region for controlling an audio balance setting, indicated by the label “Balance” and corresponding balance slider 506 set to an audio balance setting corresponding to balance slider position 507. In some embodiments, device 100 includes one or more audio speakers (e.g., one or more speakers 111, Figure IA). In some embodiments, device 100 generates audio outputs using the one or more audio speakers included in device 100. In some embodiments, device 100 transmits audio control signals to one or more external audio speakers outside of device 100. In some embodiments, the audio volume setting represented by volume slider 504 controls the volume of audio outputs generated by device 100 (e.g., generated by one or more audio speakers included in device 100) and/or generated by the one or more external audio speakers based on the audio control signals from device 100. In some embodiments in which device 100 includes a plurality of audio speakers (e.g., a plurality of speakers 111, Figure IA), the audio balance setting represented by balance slider 506 controls the distribution of audio output between the plurality of audio speakers. In some embodiments in which device 100 transmits audio control signals to a plurality of external audio speakers, the audio balance setting represented by balance slider 506 controls the distribution of audio output between the plurality of external audio speakers. For example, as shown in Figure 5A, the audio balance setting represented by balance slider 506 controls the distribution of audio output between a speaker labeled “F” (e.g., a left audio channel speaker) and a speaker labeled “R” (e.g., a right audio channel speaker).

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00209] Figure 5B illustrates a transition of user interface 500 from user interface 500 in Figure 5A. In particular, Figure 5B illustrates user input 503 (e.g., a tap gesture) detected while displaying user interface 500 as presented in Figure 5A. In response to detecting user input 503, switch object 502 is toggled from the left position to the right position (e.g., in accordance with user input 503 toggling switch object 502, the slider vibration setting is toggled from the “off state” to an “on” state). Also, in response to detecting user input 503, device 100 generates tactile output 508 (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz), gain max: 0.8, gain min: 0.0).

[00210] Figures 5C-5E illustrate a series of transitions of user interface 500 from user interface 500 in Figure 5B. In particular, Figures 5C-5E illustrate generation of tactile outputs in response to changes in volume slider position 505 with respect to volume slider

504. In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 5C-5E, tactile outputs are generated using a tactile output level (e.g., gain) that corresponds to the respective audio volume level indicated by a respective volume slider position.

[00211] For example, Figure 5C illustrates movement of user input 509 toward the left edge of device 100 (e.g., user input 509 is an input gesture, such as a drag gesture, leftward from an initial contact at a position corresponding to volume slider position 505, as illustrated in Figure 5B). In response to user input 509, the audio volume level indicated by volume slider 504 is changed to an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position 505-b (e.g., from an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position

505, Figure 5B). In addition, device 100 generates tactile output 510. In accordance with volume slider position 505-b indicating an audio volume level near a minimum audio volume level (e.g., zero audio volume), tactile output 510 is generated as a light tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.1).

[00212] Figure 5D illustrates a transition of user interface 500 from user interface 500 in Figure 5C. In particular, Figure 5D illustrates movement of user input 509 away from the left edge of device 100. In response to user input 509, the audio volume level indicated by volume slider 504 is changed to an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position 505-c (e.g., from an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position 505-b, Figure 5C). In addition, device 100 generates tactile output 511. In accordance with volume slider position 505-c indicating an audio volume level near a moderate audio

DK 2016 70725 A1 volume level, tactile output 511 is generated as a moderate tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.4).

[00213] Figure 5E illustrates a transition of user interface 500 from user interface 500 in Figure 5D. In particular, Figure 5E illustrates movement of user input 509 toward the right edge of device 100. In response to user input 509, the audio volume level indicated by volume slider 504 is changed to an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position 505-d (e.g., from an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position 505-c, Figure 5D). In addition, device 100 generates tactile output 512. In accordance with volume slider position 505-d indicating an audio volume level near a maximum audio volume level, tactile output 512 is generated as a strong tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.7).

[00214] Figure 5F illustrates a transition of user interface 500 from user interface 500 in Figure 5E. In particular, Figure 5F illustrates continued movement of user input 509 toward the right edge of device 100. In response to user input 509, the audio volume level indicated by volume slider 504 is changed to an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position 505-e (e.g., from an audio volume level corresponding to volume slider position 505-d, Figure 5E). In the example shown in Figure 5F, volume slider position 505-e is an end position of volume slider 504 (e.g., corresponding to a maximum audio volume level). Accordingly, device 100 generates tactile output 513 (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz), gain max: 0.6, gain min: 0.3) to indicate that an end of volume slider 504 has been reached.

[00215] Figures 5G-5H illustrate a series of transitions of user interface 500 from user interface 500 in Figure 5F. In particular, Figures 5G-5H illustrate generation of tactile outputs in response to changes in balance slider position 507 with respect to balance slider

506. As discussed above with respect to Figure 5A, the audio balance setting represented by balance slider 506 controls the distribution of audio output between a speaker labeled “F” (e.g., a left audio channel speaker) and a speaker labeled “R” (e.g., a right audio channel speaker). In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 5G-5H, tactile outputs are generated using a tactile output level (e.g., gain) that corresponds to the respective audio balance setting indicated by a respective balance slider position.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00216] For example, Figure 5G illustrates movement of user input 514 toward the left edge of device 100 (e.g., user input 514 is an input gesture, such as a drag gesture, leftward from an initial contact at a position corresponding to balance slider position 507, as illustrated in Figure 5F). In response to user input 514, the audio balance setting indicated by balance slider 506 is changed (e.g., from an audio balance setting corresponding to balance slider position 507, Figure 5F) to an audio balance setting corresponding to balance slider position 507-b. As shown in Figure 5G, balance slider position 507-b is near an edge (e.g., the left edge) of balance slider 506. In some embodiments, balance slider position 507-b indicates an audio balance setting having close to a maximum allocation of audio output to the “L” speaker and close to a minimum allocation of audio output to the “R” speaker. In response to user input 514, device 100 generates left-side tactile output 515-a (e.g., using one or more tactile output generator(s) 167, Figure IA, that are located in a left region of device 100) and right-side tactile output 515-b (e.g., using one or more tactile output generator(s) 167, Figure IA, that are located in a right region of device 100). In addition, in accordance with balance slider position 507-b indicating an audio balance setting having close to a maximum allocation of audio output to the “L” speaker, left-side tactile output 515-a is generated as a strong tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.7). In accordance with balance slider position 507-b indicating an audio balance setting having close to a minimum allocation of audio output to the “R” speaker, right-side tactile output 515-b is generated as a light tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.1).

[00217] Figure 5H illustrates a transition of user interface 500 from user interface 500 in Figure 5G. In particular, Figure 5H illustrates movement of user input 514 away from the left edge and toward the right edge of device 100. In response to user input 514, the audio balance setting indicated by balance slider 506 is changed (e.g., from an audio balance setting corresponding to balance slider position 507-b, Figure 5G) to an audio balance setting corresponding to balance slider position 507-c. As shown in Figure 5H, balance slider position 507-c is near an edge (e.g., the right edge) of balance slider 506. In some embodiments, balance slider position 507-c indicates an audio balance setting having close to a maximum allocation of audio output to the “R” speaker and close to a minimum allocation of audio output to the “L” speaker. In response to user input 514, device 100 generates left-side tactile output 516-a (e.g., using one or more tactile output generator(s)

DK 2016 70725 A1

167, Figure IA, that are located in a left region of device 100) and right-side tactile output 516-b (e.g., using one or more tactile output generator(s) 167, Figure IA, that are located in a right region of device 100). In addition, in accordance with balance slider position 507-c indicating an audio balance setting having close to a maximum allocation of audio output to the “R” speaker, right-side tactile output 516-b is generated as a strong tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.7). In accordance with balance slider position 507-c indicating an audio balance setting having close to a minimum allocation of audio output to the “L” speaker, left-side tactile output 516-a is generated as a light tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.1).

[00218] Figures 5I-5J illustrate an example user interface for generating tactile outputs when a user input moves across displayed menu items, in accordance with some embodiments. In particular, Figure 51 illustrates user input 521 (e.g., a contact) detected at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to keyboard interface menu icon 522 in user interface 520. In response to detecting user input 521, keyboard interface menu 523 is displayed. Keyboard interface menu 523 includes a plurality of displayed menu item affordances representing keyboard interface options, including keyboard option affordance 524 (for selecting an English-language keyboard interface), keyboard option affordance 525 (for selecting an Emoji keyboard interface), and keyboard option affordance 526 (for selecting a French-language keyboard interface). Prior to movement of user interface 521, a current selection indication (e.g., shading) is displayed on keyboard option affordance 524 to indicate that the keyboard interface corresponding to keyboard option affordance 524 (e.g., an English-language keyboard interface) is the currently displayed keyboard interface.

[00219] Figure 5J illustrates a series of transitions of user interface 520 over time from 520 in Figure 51. Figure 5J illustrates movement of user input 521 (e.g., user input 521 is a continuous input gesture from an initial contact at a position corresponding to keyboard option menu icon 522, as illustrated in Figure 51) across the displayed menu item affordances of keyboard option menu 523. At T=ti, user input 521 has moved toward keyboard option affordance 526 but has not reached a position that corresponds to (e.g., activates selection of) keyboard option affordance 526. Accordingly, the current selection indication continues to be displayed on keyboard option affordance 526.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00220] At T=t₂, user input 521 has moved to a position that activates selection of keyboard option affordance 526. In accordance with user input 521 activating selection of keyboard option affordance 526, tactile output 528 is generated (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz), gain: 0.4). In addition, a current selection indication (e.g., shading) is displayed on keyboard option affordance 526 to indicate that keyboard option affordance 526 is the currently selected keyboard option affordance. Accordingly, the current selection indication is no longer displayed on keyboard option affordance 524. In some embodiments, upon ceasing to detect user input 521 while the current selection indication is displayed on keyboard option affordance 526, the keyboard interface corresponding to keyboard option affordance 526 becomes the currently displayed keyboard interface.

[00221] At T=tß, user input 521 has moved toward keyboard option 525 but has not reached a position that corresponds to (e.g., activates selection of) keyboard option affordance 525. Accordingly, the current selection indication continues to be displayed on keyboard option affordance 526.

[00222] At T=t4, user input 521 has moved to a position that activates selection of keyboard option affordance 525. In accordance with user input 521 activating selection of keyboard option affordance 525, tactile output 529 is generated. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated in accordance with a user input activating selection of a respective menu item affordance (e.g., one of keyboard option affordances 524, 525, 526) in a menu (e.g., keyboard interface menu 523). In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated in accordance with a user input activating selection of a respective menu item affordance that is distinct from a previously selected menu item. In some embodiments, tactile outputs generated in accordance with a user input activating selection of respective menu item affordances in keyboard interface menu 523 are of a same type. For example, tactile output 529, generated at T=t4 in accordance with user input 521 activating selection of keyboard option affordance 525, is a same type of tactile output (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz), gain: 0.4) as tactile output 528, generated at T=t3 in accordance with user input 521 activating selection of keyboard option affordance 526.

[00223] Figures 5K-5O illustrate an example user interface for generating tactile outputs when a moveable component rotates in accordance with one or more scroll inputs, in accordance with some embodiments. In the example shown in Figures 5K-5O, user

DK 2016 70725 A1 interface 530 displayed on touch screen 112 includes a user interface for a time picker (e.g., generated by using a UIDatePicker class described in Appendix B). User interface 530 includes moveable component 531 that further includes moveable elements, e.g., hour wheel 532 for selecting an hour value from 0-23 hours and minute wheel 533 for selecting a minute value from 0-59 min. In some embodiments, user interface 530 is a date picker (e.g., including a movable component for selecting a year, a month, and a date value from a plurality of year, month, and date values, respectively). In some embodiments, tactile outputs are generated when moveable component 531, or a moveable element of moveable component 531, such as hour wheel 532 or minute wheel 533, moves through respective markers (e.g., a position marked by a stationary indicator, such as “hours” for hour wheel 532, or “min” for minute wheel 533).

[00224] Figures 5K-5O illustrate moving minute wheel 533 and tactile outputs generated in connection with moving minute wheel 533. Figure 5K illustrates that minute wheel 533 of moveable component 531 initially displays a selected minute value of “59 min.” In addition, Figure 5K illustrates user input 534 (e.g., a scroll input) detected by device 100 at a location on touch screen 112 corresponding to minute wheel 533. In some embodiments, user input 532 includes downward movement of a contact from an initial position corresponding to minute wheel 533 and subsequent liftoff of the contact.

[00225] Figures 5L-5O illustrate that, in response to detecting user input 534, minute wheel 533 is moved through respective markers. In some embodiments, as illustrated in Figures 5L-5O, after device 100 ceases to detect user input 534 (e.g., detecting liftoff of the contact of user input 534), minute wheel 533 continues to move (e.g., rotate) in accordance with a moment of inertia, and the continued movement slows down gradually until minute wheel 533 stops.

[00226] Figure 5L illustrates that in response to user input 534, minute wheel 533 has moved to a minute value “58 min.” In accordance with minute wheel 533 moving to minute value “58 min,” device 100 generates tactile output 535 (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 0.4 and minimum interval 0.05 seconds). In some embodiments, device 100 also generates an audio output (e.g., an audio output that accompanies the tactile output).

[00227] Figure 5M illustrates that minute wheel 533 has moved to a minute value “56 min” (e.g., after moving through a minute value “57 min”). In some embodiments,

DK 2016 70725 A1 generation of a tactile output corresponding to minute wheel 533 moving to a respective marker is forgone when minute wheel 533 moves fast in response to a user input (e.g., in response to a flick gesture). For example, a time interval is determined from a point in time corresponding to a most recently generated tactile output and a point in time corresponding to the anticipated tactile output corresponding to minute wheel 533 moving to the respective marker. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the time interval is less than a threshold value (e.g., 0.05 seconds), generation of the tactile output corresponding to minute wheel 533 moving to the respective marker is forgone. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5M, no tactile output is generated when minute wheel 533 moves to “56 min” because the time interval between a time corresponding to generation of a most recently generated tactile output (e.g., tactile output 535 corresponding to minute wheel 533 passing “58 min,” Figure 5L) and a time corresponding to anticipated generation of a tactile output corresponding to minute wheel 533 passing “56 min” is less than a threshold value. In other words, a tactile output is skipped when a tactile output rate limit is reached, e.g., the determined time interval is less than a minimum interval threshold (e.g., 0.05 seconds).

[00228] Figure 5N illustrates that minute wheel 533 has moved to a minute value “54 min” (e.g., after moving through a minute value “55 min”). As illustrated in Figure 5N, device 100 generates tactile output 536 (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 0.4 and minimum interval 0.05 seconds) in conjunction with minute wheel 533 moving to minute value “54 min.” In some embodiments, a time interval is determined between a time corresponding to the most recently generated tactile output (e.g., tactile output 535 corresponding to minute wheel 533 passing “58 min,” Figure 5L) and a time corresponding to tactile output 536. In some embodiments, tactile output 536 is generated in accordance with the determined time interval being at least (e.g., greater than or equal to) the threshold value.

[00229] Figure 50 illustrates that minute wheel 533 has moved to a minute value “53 min” (e.g., from minute value “54 min,” Figure 5N). As illustrated in Figure 50, no tactile output is generated when minute wheel 533 moves to “53 min” because a time interval between a time corresponding to generation of a most recently generated tactile output (e.g., tactile output 536 corresponding to minute wheel 533 passing “54 min,” Figure 5N) and a

DK 2016 70725 A1 time corresponding to anticipated generation of a tactile output corresponding to minute wheel 533 passing “53 min” is less than the threshold value.

[00230] Figures 5P-5II illustrate example user interfaces for generating tactile outputs to indicate thresholds associated with user interface elements.

[00231] Figures 5P-5W illustrate an example user interface for generating a tactile outputs to indicate a threshold associated with a list of e-mail summary items in an e-mail application (e.g., e-mail client module 140, Figures IA and 3), such as a threshold for refreshing content displayed in the e-mail application. In some embodiments, the example user interface is generated using a UIRefreshControl class described in Appendix B. In the example shown in Figures 5P-5W, user interface 540 includes a list of e-mail summary items that includes e-mail summary items 541, 542, and 543. A dashed line (which is typically not displayed to a user) represents edge 549 (e.g., a top edge) of the list of e-mail summary items. A current status of the list of e-mail summary items (e.g., “Updated Just Now”) is indicated by status indicator field 547. A second dashed line labeled D_th indicates a movement threshold for refreshing content displayed in the list of e-mail summary items of user interface 540.

[00232] In Figure 5P, device 100 detects user input 544 (e.g., a contact) at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to the list of e-mail summary items (e.g., corresponding to e-mail summary item 541).

[00233] Figure 5Q illustrates a transition of user interface 540 from user interface 540 in Figure 5P. In particular, Figure 5Q illustrates downward movement of user input 544 (e.g., user input is a drag gesture that includes an initial contact on touch screen 112 as illustrated in Figure 5P followed by downward movement of the contact.) In response to the downward movement of user input 544, the list of e-mail summary items moves downward (e.g., e-mail summary items 541, 542, and 543 move downward in user interface 540), and, accordingly, edge 549 of the list of e-mail summary items moves downward. In some embodiments, in response to user input 544, a progress indicator 548 is displayed in a region above the list of e-mail summary items revealed by the downward movement of the list of e-mail summary items. Progress indicator 548 indicates, for example, whether the movement of user input 544 meets refresh criteria for refreshing the list of e-mail summary items and/or whether a refresh process to download and present newly received e-mails is

DK 2016 70725 A1 ongoing. As shown in Figure 5Q, prior to user input 544 crossing movement threshold D_th, progress indicator 548 is displayed with less than a full ring of progress indicator spokes.

[00234] Figure 5R illustrates a transition of user interface 540 from user interface 540 in Figure 5Q. In particular, Figure 5R illustrates further downward movement of user input

544 from its position as shown in Figure 5Q (e.g., a continuation of the drag gesture shown in Figure 5Q). In response to the downward movement of user input 544, the list of e-mail summary items moves further downward from its position as shown in Figure 5Q (e.g., email summary items 541, 542, and 543 move further downward in user interface 540). As shown in Figure 5R, in response to user input 544, edge 549 of the list of e-mail summary items has crossed movement threshold Dth. Accordingly, in some embodiments, progress indicator 548 is displayed with a full ring of progress indicator spokes. In some embodiments, the status indicated in status indicator field 547 is updated to indicate that a content refresh process is initiated (e.g., “Checking for Mail...”), such as a content refresh process to check for e-mail received since a last time that content was refreshed. In addition, device 100 generates tactile output 545. In some embodiments, device 100 generates tactile output 545 (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz), gain: 0.6) in response to edge 549 crossing movement threshold Dth. In some embodiments, in accordance with continued movement of user input 544, edge 549 is at a position beyond movement threshold Dth when tactile output

545 is generated.

[00235] Figure 5S illustrates a transition of user interface 540 from user interface 540 in Figure 5R. In particular, Figure 5S illustrates user interface 540 in response to ceasing to detect user input 544 (e.g., in response to liftoff of the contact by user input 544) from a position corresponding to edge 549 crossing movement threshold Dth (e.g., as described above with reference to Figure 5R). In response to ceasing to detect user input 544, the list of e-mail summary items is released and gradually returns to its initial position (e.g., moves upward), as illustrated in Figures 5S-5T. In addition, status indicator field 547 is updated to indicate that a new e-mail message is being downloaded (e.g., “Downloading 1 of 1”). In the example illustrated in Figure 5S, progress indicator 548 is updated to indicate that a content refresh process is in progress.

[00236] Figure 5T illustrates a transition of user interface 540 from user interface 540 in Figure 5S. In particular, Figure 5S illustrates that, after device 100 ceases to detect user

DK 2016 70725 A1 input 544, the list of e-mail summary items has returned to its initial position as illustrated in Figure 5P. In accordance with the content refresh process described above with reference to Figures 5R-5S, an e-mail summary item 546 that corresponds to a new downloaded email message is shown in the list of e-mail summary items. In some embodiments, as illustrated in Figure 5T, status indicator field 547 is updated to indicate that the list of e-mail summary items has been updated (e.g., “Updated Just Now”).

[00237] Figures 5U-5V are similar to Figures 5P-5Q, as described above. In particular, Figure 5U illustrates user input 544 (e.g., an initial contact) detected at a location on touch screen 112 corresponding to the list of e-mail summary items (e.g., corresponding to e-mail summary item 541) in user interface 540, and Figure 5V illustrates a transition of user interface 540 in response to downward movement of user input 544 (e.g., a drag gesture that includes the initial contact followed by downward movement of the contact), including downward movement of the list of e-mail summary items and edge 549. In some embodiments, if device 100 ceases to detect user input 544 (e.g., device 100 detects liftoff of the contact) before edge 549 has crossed movement threshold Dth, a tactile output is not generated in response to movement of edge 549. Figure 5W illustrates an example of such a transition of user interface 540 from user interface 540 in Figure 5V. Figure 5W illustrates that, in response to ceasing to detect user input 544, user interface 540 returns to its initial position (e.g., moves upward), and a tactile output is not generated.

[00238] Figures 5X-5Y illustrate an example user interface for generating a tactile output to indicate a threshold associated with a list of e-mail summary items in an e-mail application (e.g., e-mail client module 140, Figures 1A and 3), such as a threshold at an edge of the list of e-mail summary items. In the example shown in Figures 5X-5Y, user interface 550 includes a list of e-mail summary items that includes e-mail summary items 551, 552, 553, 554, 555, and 556. A dashed line (which is typically not displayed to a user) represents a threshold 557, which indicates a bottom edge of a display region for the list of e-mail summary items. As illustrated in Figure 5X, at least a portion of e-mail summary item 556 in the list of e-mail summary items is below threshold 557. Accordingly, the portion of e-mail summary item 556 that is below threshold 557 is not displayed. Additionally, Figure 5X illustrates a user input 558 detected at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to the list of e-mail summary items. For example, as shown in Figure

DK 2016 70725 A1

5X, user input 558 includes an initial contact that corresponds to e-mail summary item 554 of the list of e-mail summary items followed by upward movement of the contact.

[00239] Figure 5Y illustrates that, in response to the upward movement of user input 558, the list of e-mail summary items moves upward (e.g., e-mail summary items 551, 552, 553, 554, and 556 move upward in user interface 550), such that e-mail summary item 556 is displayed entirely in the display region for the list of e-mail summary items. Accordingly, a portion of e-mail summary item 551 (e.g., the topmost e-mail summary item) moves past a top edge of the display region for the list of e-mail summary items. As shown in Figure 5Y, the portion of e-mail summary item above the top edge of the display region is not displayed. In accordance with the upward movement of the list of e-mail summary items such that e-mail summary item 556 is displayed entirely, bottom edge 556-b of e-mail summary item 556, which is represented by a second, thicker dashed line, crosses threshold 557. In some embodiments, in accordance with bottom edge 556-b crossing threshold 557, device 100 generates tactile output 559 (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz), gain: 0.6).

[00240] Figures 5Z-5II illustrate an example user interface for generating tactile outputs to indicate thresholds associated with zoom operations. In particular, Figures 5Z5EE illustrate an example user interface for generating a tactile output in accordance with a zoom scale of displayed user interface elements crossing a maximum zoom threshold during a zoom-in operation. Figures 5FF-5II illustrate an example user interface for generating a tactile output in accordance with a zoom scale of displayed user interface elements crossing a minimum zoom threshold during a zoom-out operation. In the example shown in Figures 5Z-5II, user interface 560 includes a user interface of a web browser application (e.g., browser module 147, Figure IA).

[00241] Figure 5Z illustrates user interface 560 displayed on touch screen 112. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5Z, user interface 560 includes user interface region 561, indicated by the dashed outline (which is typically not displayed to a user). For example, in Figure 5Z, user interface region 561 includes content of a webpage that corresponds to the web address “apple.com,” including a plurality of user interface elements (e.g., a top menu bar including an apple icon, icons for “MacBook Air,” “MacBook Pro,” and “iMac,” etc.). Degree of zoom scale 563 indicates a zoom scale of user interface region 561 with respect to minimum zoom threshold Z_min and maximum zoom threshold Z_max. In

DK 2016 70725 A1

Figure 5Z, for example, degree of zoom scale 563 indicates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 corresponds to minimum zoom threshold Z_min. Figure 5Z also illustrates user input 562 corresponding to a depinch gesture (e.g., detection of two finger contacts at the initial positions shown in Figure 5Z and movement of the two contacts away from each other as indicated by the arrows) detected on user interface 560 at locations corresponding to (e.g., within) user interface region 561. In some embodiments, the user interface illustrated in Figure 5Z is generated by using a UIZoomEdgeFeedbackGenerator class described in Appendix B.

[00242] Figure 5AA illustrates a transition of user interface 560 from user interface 560 in Figure 5Z. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input 562 (e.g., the depinch gesture), user interface region 561 is expanded (e.g., the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is increased) such that user interface region 561 extends beyond touch screen 112 (e.g., an outer edge of user interface region 561 extends beyond one or more outer edges of touch screen 112). As a result, only a portion of user interface region 561 is displayed on touch screen 112 (e.g., portions of the top menu bar, including the apple icon, and portions of the icons for “MacBook Air” and “iMac” are not displayed on touch screen 112). Degree of zoom scale 563 indicates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 has increased above minimum zoom threshold Zmin.

[00243] Figure 5BB illustrates a transition of user interface 560 from user interface

560 in Figure 5AA. In particular, Figure 5BB illustrates that, in response to a continuation of user input 562 (e.g., a continuation of the depinch gesture by continued movement of the two contacts away from each other), user interface region 561 is further expanded (e.g., the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is further increased) such that user interface region

561 extends further beyond touch screen 112. As a result, a lesser portion of user interface 561 is displayed on touch screen 112 in Figure 5BB than in Figure 5AA (e.g., the top menu bar and the icons for “MacBook Air,” “MacBook Pro,” and “iMac” are not displayed on touch screen 112). Degree of zoom scale 563 indicates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 has increased further above minimum zoom threshold Z_min but remains below maximum zoom threshold Z_max.

[00244] Figure 5CC illustrates a transition of user interface 560 from user interface 560 in Figure 5BB. In particular, Figure 5CC illustrates that, in response to a further

DK 2016 70725 A1 continuation of user input 562 (e.g., a further continuation of the depinch gesture by further continued movement of the two contacts away from each other), user interface region 561 is further expanded (e.g., the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is further increased) such that user interface region 561 extends further beyond touch screen 112. As a result, a lesser portion of user interface 561 is displayed on touch screen 112 in Figure 5CC than in Figure 5BB. Degree of zoom scale 563 indicates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 has increased further above minimum zoom threshold Z_min to maximum zoom threshold Zmax. In accordance with the zoom scale of user interface region 561 reaching maximum zoom threshold Z_max, device 100 generates tactile output 564 (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz), gain: 0.6).

[00245] Figure 5DD illustrates a transition of user interface 560 from user interface 560 in Figure 5CC. In particular, Figure 5DD illustrates that, in response to a continuation of user input 562 (e.g., the two contacts of the depinch gesture continue to be detected after further movement of the two contacts away from each other), user interface region 561 is further expanded (e.g., the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is further increased) such that user interface region 561 extends further beyond touch screen 112. As a result, a lesser portion of user interface 561 is displayed on touch screen 112 in Figure 5DD than in Figure 5CC. Degree of zoom scale 563 indicates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 has increased above maximum zoom threshold Z_max. In some embodiments, the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is increased temporarily above maximum zoom threshold Z_max in response to the continuation of user input 562.

[00246] Figure 5EE illustrates a transition of user interface 560 from user interface

560 in Figure 5DD. In particular, Figure 5EE illustrates user interface 560 in response to ceasing to detect user input 562 (e.g., in response to liftoff of the two contacts of the depinch gesture). While Figure 5DD illustrates that the zoom scale of user interface region

561 is temporarily increased above maximum zoom threshold Z_max in response to user input

562, Figure 5EE illustrates that, in response to ceasing to detect user input 562, the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is restored to Z_max, as indicated by degree of zoom scale

563.

[00247] Figures 5FF-5II illustrate alternate transitions of user interface 560 corresponding to generating a tactile output in accordance with the zoom scale of user

DK 2016 70725 A1 interface region 561 crossing minimum zoom threshold Z_min during a zoom-out operation. Figure 5FF is similar to Figure 5AA and illustrates that user interface region 561 of user interface 560 is expanded such that user interface region 561 extends beyond touch screen 112 (e.g., user interface region 561 extends beyond one or more outer edges of touch screen 112). As a result, only a portion of user interface region 561 is displayed on touch screen 112 (e.g., portions of the top menu bar, including the apple icon, and portions of the icons for “MacBook Air” and “iMac” are not displayed on touch screen 112). Degree of zoom scale 563 indicates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is above minimum zoom threshold Z_min at a zoom scale similar to the zoom scale shown in Figure 5AA. Figure 5FF also illustrates user input 565 corresponding to a pinch gesture (e.g., detection of two finger contacts at the initial positions shown in Figure 5FF and movement of the two contacts toward each other as indicated by the arrows) detected on user interface 560 at locations corresponding to (e.g., within) user interface region 561.

[00248] Figure 5GG illustrates a transition of user interface 560 from user interface 560 in Figure 5FF. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input 565 (e.g., the pinch gesture), device 100 shrinks user interface region 561 (e.g., decreases the zoom scale of user interface region 561) such that user interface region 561 does not extend beyond touch screen 112 (e.g., user interface region 561 is fully displayed on touch screen 112). Degree of zoom scale 563 indicates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is at minimum zoom threshold Zmin (e.g., the zoom scale of user interface region 561 has decreased from the zoom scale shown in Figure 5FF to Zmin). In response to the zoom scale of user interface region 561 reaching minimum zoom threshold Z_min, device 100 generates tactile output 566 (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz), gain: 0.6).

[00249] Figure 5HH illustrates a transition of user interface 560 from user interface 560 in Figure 5GG. In Figure 5HH, in response to detecting a continuation of user input 565 (e.g., the two contacts of the pinch gesture continue to be detected after further movement of the two contacts toward each other), device 100 shrinks user interface further (e.g., the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is further decreased) such that an outer edge of user interface region 561 is within touch screen 112. Degree of zoom scale 563 indicates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 has decreased below minimum zoom threshold Zmin. In some embodiments, the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is decreased temporarily below minimum zoom threshold Z_min in response to the continuation of user input 565.

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00250] Figure 511 illustrates a transition of user interface 560 from user interface 560 in Figure 5HH. In particular, Figure 511 illustrates user interface 560 in response to ceasing to detect user input 565 (e.g., in response to liftoff of the two contacts of the pinch gesture). While Figure 5HH illustrates that the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is temporarily decreased below minimum zoom threshold Z_min in response to user input 565, Figure 511 illustrates that, in response to ceasing to detect user input 565, the zoom scale of user interface region 561 is restored to Zmin, as indicated by degree of zoom scale 563.

[00251] Figures 5JJ-5SS illustrate example user interfaces for generating tactile outputs with respect to operations for picking up, dragging, and dropping user interface objects, in accordance with some embodiments.

[00252] Figures 5JJ-5KK illustrate an example list user interface for generating tactile outputs with respect to rearranging list elements in the list, in accordance with some embodiments. The rearrangement is performed due to movement of a list element in accordance with movement of a user input (e.g., a drag gesture that includes an initial contact followed by movement of the contact). In Figure 5JJ, user interface 570a includes an example clock interface for editing a list of clocks for displaying local times associated with a plurality of cities (e.g., based on time zones associated with the cities “Cupertino,” “New York,” “Tokyo,” and “Melbourne”). User interface 570a includes a plurality of predetermined snap positions that correspond to a plurality of positions for displaying list elements. As shown in Figure 5JJ, the list elements (e.g., clocks) are displayed in respective predetermined snap positions, including list element 572, labeled “Tokyo,” and list element 573, labeled “New York.” Figure 5JJ also illustrates a user input 571 detected at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to list element 572 (e.g., corresponding to a reordering affordance located near the right edge of list element 572).

[00253] Figure 5KK illustrates a series of transitions of user interface 570a from user interface 570a in Figure 5JJ. The series of transitions of user interface 570a includes user interfaces 570b, 570c, 570d, and 570e corresponding to first, second, third, and fourth portions of user input 571, respectively. In Figure 5KK, time T=to corresponds to user interface 570a as shown in and described above with reference to Figure 5JJ. At time T=ti, user interface 570b illustrates that list element 572 is selected in response to the first portion of user input 571 (e.g., an initial contact or a long press gesture). Device 100 visually

DK 2016 70725 A1 indicates that list element 572 is selected (e.g., by highlighting and/or enlarging selected list element 572). Optionally, in some embodiments, in response to the first portion of user input 571 selecting list element 572, device 100 generates tactile output 574b (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 1.0) to indicate that list element 572 has been selected.

[00254] In some embodiments, while list element 572 is selected, the second portion of user input 571 is detected. For example, the second portion of user input 571 includes continued contact followed by upward movement of the contact (e.g., upward movement following the initial contact or long press gesture). At time T=t₂, user interface 570c illustrates that, in accordance with upward movement of user input 571 during the second portion of user input 571, selected list element 572 is moved upwards. For example, selected list element 572 moves upward towards a position of unselected list element 573 (e.g., “New York”). Accordingly, selected list element 572 is displayed over at least a portion of unselected list element 573.

[00255] At time T=h, user interface 570d illustrates continued upward movement of user input 571, detected during the third portion of user input 571, from the position of user input 571 as shown in user interface 570c corresponding to time T=t₂. In accordance with the continued upward movement of user input 571, selected list element 572 moves into a predetermined snap position corresponding to the previous position of unselected list element 573 (e.g., as shown in user interface 570c). In some embodiments, the predetermined snap position corresponding to the previous position of selected list element 572 (e.g., as shown in user interface 570a) becomes vacant. In accordance with selected list element 572 moving into the predetermined snap position corresponding to the previous position of unselected list element 573, unselected list element 573 moves downward into the predetermined snap position corresponding to the previous position of selected list element 572 (e.g., unselected list element 573 and selected list element 572 are displayed as having switched positions). In some embodiments, in conjunction with selected list element 572 moving into the predetermined snap position previously corresponding to unselected list element 573, device 100 generates tactile output 574d (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 1.0).

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00256] At time T=t4, device 100 has ceased to detect user input 571 (e.g., device 100 has detected the fourth portion of user input 571, the fourth portion of user input 571 including liftoff of the contact) while selected list element 572 is at the predetermined snap position as shown in user interface 570d corresponding to time T=t3. Accordingly, list element 572 settles into and is displayed (e.g., as an unselected list element) in the position previously occupied by list element 573, while list element 573 is displayed in the position previously occupied by list element 572 (e.g., as shown in user interface 570a). Optionally, in some embodiments, in response to list element 572 settling into the list of clocks, device 100 generates tactile output 574e (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 0.6) to indicate that list element 572 has been dropped.

[00257] Figures 5LL-5QQ illustrate an example calendar user interface for generating tactile outputs with respect to moving calendar objects, in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 5LL illustrates that user interface 575 includes two existing calendar objects corresponding to existing calendar entries (e.g., “Have Lunch” and “Go to Gym”). Calendar object 576, labeled “Go to Gym” is initially scheduled for Wednesday, September 3 at 11:15 AM. In some embodiments, user interface 575 is generated by using a UITableView class described in Appendix B.

[00258] Figure 5MM illustrates a transition of user interface 575 from user interface 575 in Figure 5LL. In particular, Figure 5MM illustrates a first portion of user input 577 (e.g., a long press gesture) detected at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to calendar object 576. In response to the first portion of user input 577, calendar object 576 is selected (e.g., picked up). In some embodiments, a visual indication is displayed to indicate that a calendar object has been selected, such that the calendar object appears to be lifted from the surface of a user interface in the virtual z-direction and/or floating on or above the surface of the user interface. For example, in Figure 5MM, selected calendar object 576b is displayed in place of calendar object 576 (as in Figure 5LL). Selected calendar object 576b is displayed with two handles. In addition, a color of selected calendar object 576b is darkened (e.g., with respect to calendar object 576, Figure 5LL), and a shadow is displayed such that calendar object 576b appears to be lifted from the surface of user interface 575 (e.g., calendar object 576b appears to be casting a shadow onto user interface 575). In some embodiments, in conjunction with visually indicating the selection of calendar object 576

DK 2016 70725 A1 (e.g., by displaying selected calendar object 576b), device 100 generates tactile output 578 (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 1.0).

[00259] Figure 5NN illustrates a transition of user interface 575 from user interface 575 in Figure 5MM. In particular, Figure 5NN illustrates a second portion of user input 577 that includes lateral movement of user input 577 (e.g., from the position of user input 577 as illustrated in Figure 5MM) toward a right edge of touch screen 112. In response to the lateral movement of the second portion of user input 577, selected calendar object 576b is dragged toward the right edge of touch screen 112 in user interface 575. In some embodiments, while selected calendar object 576b is dragged by movement of user input 577, calendar object 576 is displayed (e.g., a ghost image of the moving object that indicates an existing or pre-movement position of the moving object, in some embodiments having the same appearance as unselected objects, such as the unselected object “Have Lunch”). In some embodiments, while selected calendar object 576b is dragged, selected calendar object 576b snaps to one or more respective snap positions (e.g., corresponding to respective days or hours) when selected calendar object 576b approaches respective snap positions.

[00260] Figure 500 illustrates a transition of user interface 575 from user interface 575 in Figure 5NN, in response to a third portion of user input 577 that includes further movement of user input 577 (e.g., movement of continued contact corresponding to selected calendar object 576b) toward the right edge of touch screen 112. In some embodiments, movement of user input 577 to a boundary (e.g., an edge) of the displayed calendar interface, or to within a predetermined distance from a boundary of the displayed calendar interface, triggers updating the calendar interface in accordance with the movement of user input 577. For example, in accordance with movement of user input 577 to a boundary of the displayed calendar interface, or to within a predetermined distance from the boundary of the displayed calendar interface, an additional portion of the calendar interface that corresponds to (e.g., is adjacent to) the boundary is displayed. In some embodiments, in conjunction with an additional portion of the calendar interface being displayed, a portion of the calendar interface opposite the boundary is no longer displayed (e.g., a displayed date range or a displayed time range of the calendar interface is shifted forward or backward by at least one date or time interval). For example, in Figure 500, in accordance with the further movement of user input 577 toward the right edge of touch screen 112, user input 577 moves within a predetermined distance from a right edge of user interface 575 that

DK 2016 70725 A1 corresponds to a date boundary for Saturday, September 6 (e.g., a date boundary between Saturday, September 6 and Sunday, September 7, not visible in user interface 575 in Figure 500).

[00261] In response to the further movement of the third portion of user input 577 as illustrated in Figure 500, Figure 5PP illustrates a transition of user interface 575 from user interface 575 in Figure 500. In particular, Figure 5PP illustrates that, in response to user input 577, a date range displayed in user interface 575 is shifted forward in time by one day (e.g., user interface 575 is updated to include display of Sunday, September 7 in the rightmost date column and to exclude display of Sunday, August 31 in the leftmost date column). In some embodiments, a position of selected calendar object 576b is maintained while the date range is shifted forward (e.g., selected calendar object 576b appears to float above the surface of user interface 575 while the date range appears to slide forward underneath selected calendar object 576b). For example, the position of selected calendar object 576b is maintained in the leftmost date column while user interface 575 is updated from displaying Saturday, September 6 in the leftmost date column (Figure 500) to displaying Sunday, September 7 in the leftmost date column, as shown in Figure 5PP. Accordingly, selected calendar object 576b snaps to a respective snap position on Sunday, September 7. In some embodiments, in accordance with selected calendar object 576b snapping to the respective snap position, device 100 generates tactile output 578b (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 0.4).

[00262] Figure 5QQ illustrate a transition of user interface 575 from user interface 575 in Figure 5PP. In particular, Figure 5QQ illustrates user interface 575 in response to ceasing to detect user input 577 (e.g., in response to detecting a fourth portion of user input 577 that includes liftoff of the contact). In response to ceasing to detect user input 577, device 100 visually indicates deselection of selected calendar object 576b (e.g., corresponding to dropping selected calendar object 576b in the respective position indicated in Figure 5QQ) by ceasing to display calendar object 576 (e.g., the ghost object) in its previous position (e.g., as shown in Figure 5PP) and/or changing the appearance of selected calendar object 576b to appear unselected (e.g., by displaying calendar object 576 in place of selected calendar object 576b and ceasing to display selected calendar object 576b) such that calendar object 576 appears to have been moved. In some embodiments, in accordance

DK 2016 70725 A1 with selected calendar object 576b being dropped (e.g., calendar object 576 being moved), device 100 generates tactile output 578c (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 0.6).

[00263] Figures 5RR-5SS illustrate an example user interface for generating tactile outputs with respect to rearranging array elements in an array, in accordance with some embodiments. In Figure 5RR, user interface 580a includes an example home screen interface for displaying an array of elements (e.g., application icons), including application icon 582, labeled “Maps,” and application icon 583, labeled “Stocks.” The array of elements includes a plurality of predetermined snap positions that correspond to a plurality of positions for displaying array elements. As shown in Figure 5RR, user input 581 (e.g., a contact) is detected at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to application icon 582 in user interface 580a. In some embodiments, user interface 580a is generated by using a UlCollectionView class described in Appendix B.

[00264] Figure 5SS illustrates a series of transitions of user interface 580a from user interface 580a in Figure 5RR. The series of transitions of user interface 580a includes user interfaces 580b, 580c, 580d, and 580e corresponding to first, second, third, and fourth portions of user input 581, respectively. In Figure 5SS, time T=to corresponds to user interface 580a as shown in and described above with reference to Figure 5RR. At time T=ti, user interface 580b illustrates that application icon 582 is selected in response to the first portion of user input 581 (e.g., a long press gesture). In some embodiments, device 100 visually indicates that application icon 582 is selected (e.g., by shading application icon 582 and/or enlarging application icon 582). Optionally, in some embodiments, in response to the first portion of user input 581 selecting application icon 582, device 100 generates tactile output 584b (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 1.0), as shown in tactile output graph 584, to indicate that application icon 582 has been selected. In some embodiments, device 100 provides a visual indication that user interface 580b corresponds to an array element rearrangement mode (e.g., by animating one or more application icons, such as by using a shaking animation as indicated at 579) while application icon 582 is selected.

[00265] In some embodiments, while application icon 582 is selected, the second portion of user input 581 is detected. For example, the second portion of user input 581 includes continued contact followed by movement of the contact to the left toward “Stocks” application icon 583. At time T=t2, user interface 580c illustrates that, in accordance with

DK 2016 70725 A1 the movement of user input 581 during the second portion of user input 581, application icon 582 moves to the left and passes over application icon 583. Accordingly, application icon 582 is displayed over at least a portion of application icon 583.

[00266] At time T=t3, user interface 580d illustrates continued movement of user input 581 toward the left. In accordance with the continued movement of user input 581, application icon 582 moves into a predetermined snap position corresponding to the previous position of unselected application icon 583 (e.g., as shown in user interface 580c).

In some embodiments, the predetermined snap position corresponding to the previous position of unselected application icon 583 (e.g., as shown in user interface 580a) becomes vacant. Accordingly, in some embodiments, unselected application icon 583 moves to the right into the predetermined snap position vacated by application icon 583. In some embodiments, in conjunction with selected application icon 582 moving into the predetermined snap position previously occupied by unselected application icon 583, device 100 generates tactile output 584d (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 1.0).

[00267] At time T=t4, device 100 has ceased to detect user input 581 (e.g., device 100 has detected the fourth portion of user input 581 including liftoff of the contact) while selected application icon 582 is at the predetermined snap position as shown in user interface 580d corresponding to time T=t3. Accordingly, application icon 582 settles into and is displayed (e.g., as an unselected application icon in the array) in the position previously occupied by application icon 583, while application icon 583 is displayed in the position previously occupied by application icon 582 (e.g., application icon 582 and application icon 583 are displayed in switched positions). Optionally, in some embodiments, in response to application icon 582 setting into the array, device 100 generates tactile output 584e (e.g., MicroTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 0.6) to indicate that application icon 582 has been dropped.

[00268] Figures 5TT-5UU illustrate a tactile output that varies based on a characteristic intensity of a user input. Figure 5TT illustrates user interface 590a that includes an example user interface of a list of e-mail summary items in an e-mail application (e.g., e-mail client module 140, Figures 1A and 3) and a first portion of user input 591 (e.g., a contact) detected at a location on touch screen 112 corresponding to email 592 in the list of e-mail summary items. A characteristic intensity of the contact is

DK 2016 70725 A1 above a detection threshold intensity ITO and below a hint threshold intensity ITH, as indicated by intensity meter 596. In response to detecting user input 591, device 100 displays a visual indication (e.g., highlighting) to indicate that e-mail 592 is selected.

[00269] Figure 5UU illustrates a series of transitions of user interface 590a from user interface 590a in Figure 5TT. The series of transitions of user interface 590a include user interfaces 590b, 590c, and 590d corresponding to increases in a characteristic intensity of user input 591. In Figure 5UU, user interface 590a as shown in and described above with reference to Figure 5TT is displayed at time T=to. At time T=ti, the characteristic intensity of user input 591 has increased to hint threshold intensity ITh. Accordingly, device 100 displays a hint state of e-mail 592, as shown in user interface 590b. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity of user input 591 continues to increase between ti and t2 toward light press threshold intensity ITl. In some embodiments, as the characteristic intensity of user input 591 approaches light press threshold intensity ITl, device 100 generates tactile output 594a (e.g., as a tactile indication of the detected increase in the characteristic intensity of user input 591). In some embodiments, as the characteristic intensity of user input 591 increases toward light press threshold intensity ITl, device 100 gradually increases a characteristic of tactile output 594a (e.g., an amplitude of tactile output 594a increases from zero) as shown in tactile output graph 594. In some embodiments, device 100 gradually increases the characteristic of tactile output 594a as the characteristic intensity of user input 591 increases from zero. In some embodiments, device 100 gradually increases the characteristic of tactile output 594a as the characteristic intensity of user input 591 increases from hint threshold intensity ITh (e.g., as shown in tactile output graph 594).

[00270] At time T=t2, the characteristic intensity of user input 591 crosses light press threshold intensity ITl. In accordance with the characteristic intensity of user input 591 crossing light press threshold intensity ITl, user interface 590c illustrates display of a preview of information corresponding to e-mail 592 (e.g., a short preview of content of email 592). In some embodiments, device 100 generates tactile output 594b (e.g., a discrete tap, such as a MicroTap Custom (200Hz) with a gain of 1.0) when the characteristic intensity of user input 591 reaches light press threshold intensity ITl.

[00271] In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity of user input 591 continues to increase between t2 and t3 toward deep press threshold intensity ITd. In some

DK 2016 70725 A1 embodiments, as the characteristic intensity of user input 591 approaches deep press threshold intensity, device 100 generates tactile output 594c (e.g., as a tactile indication of the detected increase in the characteristic intensity of user input 591. In some embodiments, device 100 gradually increases a characteristic of tactile output 594c (e.g., an amplitude of tactile output 594c increases from zero) as shown in tactile output graph 594.

[00272] At time T=b, the characteristic intensity of user input 591 crosses deep press threshold intensity ITd. In accordance with the characteristic intensity of user input 591 crossing deep press threshold intensity ITd, user interface 590d illustrates display of e-mail 592 (e.g., the preview of content of e-mail 592 expands to a full screen display of e-mail 592). In some embodiments, device 100 generates tactile output 594d (e.g., a discrete tap, such as a FullTap Custom (150Hz) with a gain of 1.0) when the characteristic intensity of user input 591 reaches deep press threshold ITd.

[00273] Figures 5VV-5YY illustrate example user interfaces and timing diagrams for displaying user interface changes and generating tactile outputs corresponding to user interface events.

[00274] Figure 5VV illustrates an example user interface and timing diagram for displaying one or more user interface changes and generating a tactile output corresponding to a user interface event in response to a user input (e.g., in response to direct manipulation of the user interface by a touch input). In some embodiments, display of the one or more user interface changes is initiated immediately in response to the user input. For example, in Figure 5VV, user interface 570c is a user interface of a list of clocks as described above with reference to Figures 5JJ-5KK. In accordance with upward movement of user input 571 detected at time to, device 100 initiates display of changes to user interface 570c including movement of selected list element 572 upward into the position previously occupied by unselected list element 573, and movement of unselected list element 573 is downward into the position previously occupied by selected list element 572. In addition, in accordance with the upward movement of user input 571 detected at time to, device 100 initiates generation of tactile output 574d corresponding to selected list element 572 moving into a predetermined snap position (e.g., corresponding to the previous position of unselected list element 573), as shown in tactile output graph 574-2. In some embodiments, the one or more changes to user interface 570c are displayed at time T=ti as user interface 570d, after a

DK 2016 70725 A1 first time interval ΔΤι (from to to ti) has passed. In some embodiments, generation of tactile output 574d occurs at time T=t2, after a second time interval ΔΤ2 (from to to t2) associated with generation of tactile outputs has elapsed. In some embodiments, the second time interval ΔΤ2 (e.g., 50-200 ms) is longer than the first time interval ΔΤι (e.g., 5 ms). In some embodiments, generation of tactile outputs is associated with a longer latency than a latency associated with displaying changes to the user interface.

[00275] In some embodiments, display of one or more user interface changes associated with a user interface event (e.g., a user interface event that is independent of direct manipulation of the user interface in response to a touch input) is delayed such that the one or more user interface changes is displayed concurrently with generation of a tactile output corresponding to the user interface event.

[00276] For example, Figure 5WW illustrates display of user interface changes and generation of a tactile output in accordance with a user interface event that is not in response to a user input (e.g., a user interface event that is an alert or other notification that is independent of or not in response to direct manipulation of the user interface in response to touch input). At time T=to, user interface 5100a includes a user interface for composing an e-mail message. Text 5101 represents a previously (e.g., most recently) entered portion of text in user interface 5100a. At time T=ti, movement of device 100 is detected. In some embodiments, the movement of device 100 meets predefined input pattem criteria (e.g., a pattem of shaking the device back and forth) corresponding to a user interface event that includes undoing a previously performed operation (e.g., removing a portion of previously entered text). As illustrated in Figure 5WW, the movement of device 100, detected at time ti, corresponds to a user interface event to remove previously entered text 5101 (e.g., by displaying undo prompt interface 5100b) and to generate tactile output 5102. In response to detecting the movement of device 100 at time ti, device 100 initiates, at time ti, generation of tactile output 5102. In conjunction, in some embodiments, device 100 delays initiating display of the one or more changes to user interface 5100a by delay time interval Tdeiay (e.g., device 100 initiates displaying undo prompt interface 5100b at time t2, after delay time interval Tdeiay has elapsed). In some embodiments, generation of tactile output 5102 occurs at time t3 after delay time interval ΔΤ2 associated with generation of tactile outputs has elapsed. Accordingly, in some embodiments, display of the one or more changes to user

DK 2016 70725 A1 interface 5100a (e.g., display of undo prompt interface 5100b) is synchronized with generation of tactile output 5102 (e.g., at time t₃).

[00277] In another example, Figure 5XX illustrates display of user interface changes and generation of a tactile output in accordance with a user interface event that includes a notification that is independent of direct manipulation of the user interface in response to touch input. At time T=to, user interface 5105 includes a user interface of a lock screen of device 100. At time T=ti, input 5106 (e.g., a notification of a received calendar event invitation) is received (e.g., from an information source external to device 100). In response to receiving input 5106 at time ti, device 100 initiates, at time ti, generation of tactile output 5107. In conjunction, device 100 delays initiating display of changes to user interface 5105 (e.g., display of calendar event invitation affordance 5108 on user interface 5105) by delay time interval Tdeiay (e.g., device 100 initiates displaying calendar event invitation affordance 5108 at time t₂, after delay time interval Tdeiay has elapsed). In some embodiments, generation of tactile output 5107 occurs at time t₃ after delay time interval AT₂ associated with generation of tactile outputs has elapsed. Accordingly, in some embodiments, display of the one or more changes to user interface 5105 (e.g., display of calendar event invitation affordance 5108) is synchronized with generation of tactile output 5107 (e.g., at time t₃).

[00278] In yet another example, Figure 5YY illustrates display of user interface changes and generation of a tactile output in accordance with a user interface event that includes a notification initiated in accordance with completion of a transaction initiated by a user. At time T=to, user interface 5110a includes a user interface prompting a user to provide authentication (e.g., a finger contact on a fingerprint sensor, illustrated as user input 5111) to complete a transaction. At time T=ti, device 100 receives an input 5112 that includes authentication for completion of the transaction. In response to receiving input

5112 at time ti, device 100 initiates, at time ti, generation of tactile output 5113. In conjunction, device 100 delays initiating display of changes to user interface 5110a (e.g., displaying user interface 5110b confirming completion of the transaction) by delay time interval Tdeiay (e.g., device 100 initiates displaying user interface 5110b at time t₂, after delay time interval Tdeiay has elapsed). In some embodiments, generation of tactile output

5113 occurs at time t₃ after delay time interval AT₂ associated with generation of tactile outputs has elapsed. Accordingly, in some embodiments, display of the one or more

DK 2016 70725 A1 changes to user interface 5110a (e.g., display of user interface 5110b) is synchronized with generation of tactile output 5113 (e.g., at time tß).

[00279] Figure 5ZZ illustrates timing diagrams for generating tactile outputs based on states of tactile output generators, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, one or more tactile output triggers are received by tactile output controller 5120 (e.g., haptic feedback controller 161, Figure IA). In some embodiments, in response to the tactile output triggers, tactile output controller 5120 transmits control signals to one or more tactile output generators 5121 (e.g., tactile output generator(s) 167, Figure IA). In response to the control signals, tactile output generator 5121 generates tactile outputs.

[00280] In some embodiments, in accordance with latency associated with generating tactile outputs, tactile output generator 5121 generates tactile outputs after a period of time after a tactile output trigger is received. The period of time between receipt of a tactile output trigger and generation of a corresponding tactile output varies in accordance with a state of tactile output generator 5121. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5ZZ, if a tactile output trigger is received while tactile output generator 5121 is in an inactive state, a tactile output is generated after a time period ATa (e.g., 200 ms) after the tactile output trigger is received. In some embodiments, if a tactile output trigger is received while tactile output generator 5121 is in a low-latency state (e.g., a pre-warm state or an active state), a tactile output is generated after a time period that is less than ATa. For example, Figure 5ZZ illustrates that if a tactile output trigger is received while tactile output generator 5121 is in a pre-warmed state, a tactile output is generated after a time period ATb (e.g., 100-150 ms) after the tactile output trigger is received. In some embodiments, if a tactile output trigger is received while tactile output generator 5121 is in an active state, a tactile output is generated after a time period ATc (e.g., 50 ms) after the tactile output trigger is received. In some embodiments, the time period associated with the active state is less than the time period associated with the pre-warm state.

[00281] Figures 5AAA-5CCC illustrate example user interfaces and timing for generating tactile outputs in accordance with user interface events for different types of user interface events (e.g., success, failure, and warning events).

[00282] Figure 5AAA illustrates an example of one or more tactile outputs generated for success events. Figure 5AAA includes user interface 5130 for entering authentication

DK 2016 70725 A1 credentials for connecting to a wireless network (e.g., “HomeWireless”), displayed at time T=to. At time T=ti, in accordance with a determination that authentication of the password entered in user interface 5130 was successful, user interface 5131 is displayed (e.g., indicating successful connection to the requested wireless network “HomeWireless”) and tactile output 5132 corresponding to a success event is generated (e.g., FullTap Medium (200Hz) with a gain of 0.7 followed by a MiniTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 1.0).

[00283] Figure 5BBB illustrates an example of one or more tactile outputs generated for failure events. Figure 5BBB includes user interface 5130 for entering authentication credentials for connecting to a wireless network (e.g., “HomeWireless”), displayed at time T=to. At time T=ti, in accordance with a determination that authentication of the password entered in user interface 5130 failed, user interface 5133 is displayed (e.g., indicating that an incorrect password was entered for the requested wireless network “HomeWireless”) and tactile output 5134 corresponding to a failure event is generated (e.g., MiniTap High (270Hz) with a gain of 0.75-0.85, followed by a FullTap Medium (200Hz) with a gain of 0.65, followed by a FullTap Fow (150Hz) with a gain of 0.75).

[00284] Figure 5CCC illustrates an example of one or more tactile outputs generated for warning events. Figure 5CCC includes user interface 5135 for composing an e-mail message, as described above with reference to Figure 5WW. At time T=to, movement of device 100 is detected (e.g., a pattern of shaking the device back and forth corresponding to a request to undo a previous operation). At time T=ti, in accordance with the request to undo the previous operation, undo prompt interface 5100b is displayed, as described above with reference to Figure 5WW, and tactile output 5135 corresponding to a warning event is generated (e.g., FullTap High (300Hz) with a gain of 0.9 followed by a FullTap Custom (270Hz) with a gain of 0.9).

[00285] Figures 5DDD-5GGG illustrate an example user interface for generating tactile outputs in accordance with magnitudes of operations performed in the user interface in response to user input, in accordance with some embodiments. In particular, Figures 5DDD-5GGG illustrate tactile outputs generated during variable rate scrubbing, in accordance with movement of a user input across boundaries.

[00286] Figure 5DDD illustrates user interface 5140 for a media content player that includes slider control 5141, including adjustable progress indicator 5142 that indicates a

DK 2016 70725 A1 current position in the content being played on the device. In some embodiments, user interface 5140 includes a plurality of other media content player controls for controlling playback of content in the media content player. Figure 5DDD illustrates user input 5143, initially detected at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to an initial position of progress indicator 5142 in slider control 5141. Figure 5DDD also illustrates movement of user input 5143 away from its initial location (e.g., user input 5143 includes a drag gesture that includes an initial contact followed by movement of the contact) corresponding to slider control 5141. In some embodiments, boundaries 5144, 5145, and 5146 separate areas of user interface 5140 that correspond to different scrubbing rates for adjusting the position of progress indicator 5142 in slider control 5141. In some embodiments, boundaries 5144,

5145, and 5146 are not typically displayed to a user. In some embodiments, while user input 5143 is above boundary 5144, the position of progress indicator 5142 in slider control 5141 moves by the same amount as a horizontal component of movement of user input 5143 on touch screen 112 that includes movement parallel to the slider control (sometimes referred to as “full-speed scrubbing”). In some embodiments, while user input 5143 is between boundary 5144 and boundary 5145, the position of progress indicator 5142 in slider control 5141 moves by an amount that is a fraction (e.g., one-half or equivalently 50%) of the horizontal component of movement of user input 5143 on touch screen 112 that is parallel to slider control 5141 (sometimes referred to as “half-speed scrubbing”). In some embodiments, while user input 5143 is between boundary 5145 and boundary 5146, the position of progress indicator 5142 in slider control 5141 moves by an amount that is a smaller fraction (e.g., one-quarter or equivalently 25%) of the horizontal component of movement of user input 5143 on touch screen 112 that is parallel to slider control 5141 (sometimes referred to as “quarter-speed scrubbing”). In some embodiments, while user input 5143 is below boundary 5146, the position of progress indicator 5142 in slider control 5141 moves by an amount that is an even smaller fraction (e.g., one-eighth or equivalently 12.5%) of the horizontal component of movement of user input 5143 on touch screen 112 that is parallel to slider control 5141 (sometimes referred to as “fine-speed scrubbing”). It is noted that the fractional scrubbing rates used here (50%, 25%, and 12.5%) are merely examples, and that different scrubbing rates that progressively decrease as vertical distance between a user input and slider control 5141 increases may also be used.

100

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00287] In some embodiments, device 100 generates tactile outputs in accordance with user input 5143 crossing respective boundaries. In some embodiments, the tactile outputs are generated in accordance with a characteristic of user input 5143 that corresponds to an operation in user interface 5140. For example, the tactile outputs are generated in accordance with a velocity of user input 5143 when crossing a respective boundary that corresponds to a change in a scrubbing rate. In some embodiments, a stronger tactile output is generated when user input 5143 crosses a respective boundary with a high velocity. In some embodiments, a lighter tactile output is generated when user input 5143 crosses a respective boundary with a low velocity.

[00288] Figure 5EEE illustrates movement of user input 5143 downward and toward the right with respect to its initial position (e.g., as shown in Figure 5DDD), away from slider control 5141 and crossing boundary 5144. In accordance with user input 5143 crossing boundary 5144, device 100 generates tactile output 5148. In accordance with a velocity of the movement of user input 5143 being above a moderate velocity threshold Vm and below a high velocity threshold Vh, as indicated by velocity of contact meter 5147, tactile output 5148 is generated as a moderate tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.4).

[00289] Figure 5FFF illustrates further movement of user input 5143 downward and toward the right with respect to its position as shown in Figure 5EEE, further away from slider control 5141 and crossing boundary 5145. In accordance with user input 5143 crossing boundary 5145, device 100 generates tactile output 5149. In accordance with the velocity of the movement of user input 5143 being above a high velocity threshold Vf, as indicated by velocity of contact meter 5147, tactile output 5149 is generated as a strong tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.7).

[00290] Figure 5GGG illustrates even further movement of user input 5143 downward and toward the right with respect to its position as shown in Figure 5FFF, further away from slider control 5141 and crossing boundary 5146. In accordance with user input 5143 crossing boundary 5146, device 100 generates tactile output 5150. In accordance with the velocity of the movement of user input 5143 being below the moderate velocity threshold Vm and above a movement detection threshold Vo (e.g., zero velocity), as

101

DK 2016 70725 A1 indicated by velocity of contact meter 5147, tactile output 5150 is generated as a light tactile output (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150Hz) with a gain of 0.1).

[00291] Figures 5HHH-5III illustrate timing diagrams for generating tactile outputs in accordance with detecting a continuous user interaction and in accordance with a state of one or more tactile output generates used to generate the tactile outputs. In particular, Figure 5HHH illustrates slider 5160 having a position indicator 5161 in an initial position at time T=to. A tactile output generator for generating one or more tactile outputs in accordance with position indicator 5161 of slider 5160 crossing a respective marker on slider 5160 is initially in a low-power state, as shown in generator state graph 5164. In accordance with a first portion of a user interaction that moves position indicator 5161 to the position shown at time T=ti, position indicator 5161 approaches but does not cross marker 5162. The tactile output generator remains in the low-power state (e.g., the state of the tactile output generator is maintained or not changed). At time T=t₂, in accordance with a second portion of the user interaction, position indicator 5161 crosses marker 5162. Accordingly, generation of a tactile output is initiated at time t₂, as shown in tactile output graph 5165. In some embodiments, in accordance with latency associated with the low-power state, tactile output 5163 is generated at time t=t4, after time period ΔΤα (e.g., 200 ms) after the tactile output trigger is received at time t₂. As shown in Figure 5HHH, by time t4 (at which tactile output 5163 is generated), position indicator 5161 has moved past marker 5162 in accordance with continued movement of the user input.

[00292] In some embodiments, the state of the tactile output generator is changed in anticipation of generating a tactile output, such as in accordance with movement of a user input that approaches a threshold. For example, Figure 5III illustrates slider 5160 having a position indicator 5161 in an initial position at time T=to. A tactile output generator for generating one or more tactile outputs in accordance with position indicator 5161 of slider 5160 crossing a respective marker on slider 5160 is initially in a low-power state, as shown in generator state graph 5166. In accordance with a first portion of a user interaction that moves position indicator 5161 to the position shown at time T=ti, position indicator 5161 approaches but does not cross marker 5162. In some embodiments, in response to position indicator 5161 approaching marker 5162 (e.g., in anticipation of position indicator 5161 crossing marker 5162, for which a tactile output will be generated), the state of the tactile output generator is changed from the low-power state to the low-latency state (or

102

DK 2016 70725 A1 alternatively, in some embodiments, the active state). At time T=t2, in accordance with a second portion of the user interaction, position indicator 5161 crosses marker 5162. Accordingly, generation of a tactile output is initiated at time t2, as shown in tactile output graph 5167. In some embodiments, in accordance with latency associated with the lowlatency state, tactile output 5168 is generated at time t=t3, after time period ATb (e.g., 100150 ms) after the tactile output trigger is received at time t2. In some embodiments, time period ATb associated with the low-latency state is less than time period ATa associated with the low-power state. As shown in Figure 5III, the time t3 at which tactile output 5168 is generated occurs before time U at which tactile output 5163 is generated as shown in Figure 5HHH. In some embodiments, in accordance with changing the state of the tactile output generator, tactile outputs are generated with lower latency. In addition, in Figure 5III, position indicator 5161 has moved past marker 5162 in accordance with continued movement of the user input to a lesser extent than in Figure 5HHH.

[00293] Figure 5JJJ illustrates generation of a sequence of tactile outputs by an electronic device (e.g., portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A) while enforcing a minimum time between repeated tactile outputs, in accordance with some embodiments. Tactile output graph 5170a illustrates triggers for tactile outputs and generated tactile outputs associated with a first type of tactile output. Tactile output graph 5170b illustrates triggers for tactile outputs and generated tactile outputs associated with a second type of tactile output. At time ti, generation of a tactile output of the first type is triggered (e.g., the device generates the trigger, or the device receives a trigger from an external source), as shown in tactile output graph 5170a. In response, the device generates tactile output 5171 at a point in time following the trigger at ti and before a subsequent trigger at t2. At time t2, a second instance of the first type of tactile output is triggered. In some embodiments, the device determines that anticipated generation of a tactile output in response to the trigger at t2 is within a predetermined time from generation of tactile output 5171 (e.g., a most recent instance of the first type of tactile output that was generated). Accordingly, the device forgoes generation of the tactile output in response to the trigger at t2.

[00294] Similarly, at time t3, a third instance of the first type of tactile output is triggered, as shown in tactile output graph 5170a. In response, the device generates tactile output 5172 at a point in time following the trigger at t3 and before a subsequent trigger at U (e.g., in accordance with a determination that most recently generated tactile output 5171 of

103

DK 2016 70725 A1 the first type of tactile output is at least the predetermined time from anticipated generation of tactile output 5172). At time t4, a fourth instance of the first type of tactile output is triggered, as shown in tactile output graph 5170a. In addition, at time t4, a first instance of a second type of tactile output is triggered, as shown in tactile output graph 5170b. In some embodiments, the device determines that anticipated generation of a tactile output of the first type in response to the trigger at U is within the predetermined time from generation of tactile output 5172 (e.g., the most recent instance of the first type of tactile output that was generated, determined with respect to the trigger for the first type of tactile output at tø. Accordingly, the device forgoes generation of the tactile output in response to the trigger for the first type of tactile output at U. In some embodiments, the device generates tactile output 5176 in response to the trigger for the second type of tactile output at t4 (e.g., without regard to timing of tactile outputs of the first type). In some embodiments, the device generates tactile output 5176 in accordance with a determination that generation of tactile output 5176 will be at least a predetermined time from generation of a most recent instance of the second type of tactile output.

[00295] At time ts, a fifth instance of the first type of tactile output is triggered, as shown in tactile output graph 5170a. In response, the device generates tactile output 5173 at a point in time following the trigger at ts and before a subsequent trigger at t6 (e.g., in accordance with a determination that most recently generated tactile output 5172 of the first type of tactile output is at least the predetermined time from anticipated generation of tactile output 5173). At time tø, a sixth instance of the first type of tactile output is triggered, as shown in tactile output graph 5170a. In some embodiments, the device determines that anticipated generation of a tactile output in response to the trigger at t6 will be at least the predetermined time from generation of tactile output 5173 (e.g., the most recent instance of the first type of tactile output that was generated). Accordingly, the device generates tactile output 5174 in response to the trigger at tø. Subsequently, at time ΐγ, a seventh instance of the first type of tactile output is triggered. In some embodiments, the device determines that anticipated generation of a tactile output in response to the trigger at ΐγ is within a predetermined time from generation of tactile output 5174 (e.g., a most recent instance of the first type of tactile output that was generated). Accordingly, the device forgoes generation of the tactile output in response to the trigger at ΐγ.

104

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00296] At time ts, an eighth instance of the first type of tactile output is triggered, as shown in tactile output graph 5170a. In addition, at time ts, a second instance of the second type of tactile output is triggered, as shown in tactile output graph 5170b. In some embodiments, the device determines that anticipated generation of a tactile output of the first type in response to the trigger at ts is at least the predetermined time from generation of tactile output 5174 (e.g., the most recent instance of the first type of tactile output that was generated, determined with respect to the trigger for the first type of tactile output at ts). Accordingly, the device generates tactile output 5175 in response to the trigger for the first type of tactile output at ts. In addition, the device generates tactile output 5177 in response to the trigger for the second type of tactile output at ts (e.g., without regard to timing of tactile outputs of the first type). In some embodiments, the device generates tactile output 5177 in accordance with a determination that anticipated generation of tactile output 5177 is at least a predetermined time from generation of a most recent instance of the second type of tactile output (e.g., tactile output 5176).

[00297] Figure 5KKK illustrates a conceptual flow diagram of method 5180 for controlling a state of one or more tactile output generators (e.g., tactile output generator(s) 167, Figure IA). In some embodiments, method 5180 is performed by an applicationindependent module of an electronic device (e.g., portable multifunction device 100, Figure IA) [00298] In some embodiments, the application-independent module waits (5182) for input from an application-specific module (e.g., a trigger for generating a tactile output, such as a user input that is associated with a tactile output). In some embodiments, while the application-independent module is waiting for input, the tactile output generators are in an inactive state.

[00299] In some embodiments, the application-independent module receives (5184) an input from the application-specific module. In response to receiving the input from the application-specific module, the application-independent module determines (5186) whether to prepare one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs (e.g., whether the input meets tactile output generation criteria).

[00300] In accordance with a determination that one or more tactile output generators should not be prepared (5186-No), the application-independent module returns to the wait

105

DK 2016 70725 A1 state (5182) to wait for an additional input, and the tactile output generators are maintained in the inactive state.

[00301] In accordance with a determination that the one or more tactile output generators should be prepared (5186-Yes) (e.g., in anticipation of generating tactile outputs), the application-independent module determines (5188) whether to prepare the tactile output generators by setting the tactile output generators to a pre-warm state (e.g., associated with a lower latency than the inactive state) or an active state (e.g., associated with a lower latency than both the inactive state and the pre-warm state).

[00302] In accordance with a determination that the tactile outputs should be set to the pre-warm state (5188-Pre-Warm), the application-independent module prepares the tactile output generators by setting (5190) the tactile output generators to the pre-warm state. In accordance with a determination that the tactile outputs should be set to the active state (5188-Active), the application-independent module prepares the tactile output generators by setting (5192) the tactile output generators to the active state.

[00303] Next, in some embodiments, the application-independent module determines (5194) whether to return the tactile output generators from the pre-warm or active state to the inactive state (e.g., whether to exit the respective preparation state). In accordance with a determination to exit the preparation state (5194-Yes) (e.g., the electronic device is in a battery conservation mode of operation, or a predetermined timeout period has elapsed during which no tactile outputs were generated), the application-independent module returns to the wait state (5182). In accordance with a determination not to exit the preparation state (5194-No) (e.g., the predetermined timeout period has not elapsed since preparation of the tactile output generators was requested, or the predetermined time period has not elapsed since generation of a most recent prior tactile output), the application-independent module maintains the respective preparation state of the tactile output generators (e.g., the pre-warm state or the active state).

[00304] Figures 6A-6D are flow diagrams illustrating method 600 of generating tactile outputs based on user interaction models in accordance with some embodiments. Method 600 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure IA) with a display, one or more input devices (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, and/or one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the

106

DK 2016 70725 A1 touch-sensitive surface), and one or more tactile output generators. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 600 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00305] As described below, method 600 provides an enhanced way to provide tactile outputs using an application-independent software module. Providing tactile outputs using application-independent software based on information from application software provides common user interface framework that provides consistent user experience when various software applications are used. Providing a common user interface frame work to the user enhances the usability of such software applications and the device executing such software applications. In turn, this enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes and/or unintended operations when operating/interacting with the device). In addition, the method reduces the size of software applications and makes execution of such software applications faster. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to use software applications faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00306] In some embodiments, the device stores (e.g., in memory) application software (e.g., a first software application, such as application 1 (136-1) in Figure ID) and application-independent software (e.g., application-independent software module 260 in Figure ID) that is available for use by a plurality of software applications (e.g., the first software application, such as application 1 (136-1), and one or more other software applications, such as application 2 (136-2) in Figure ID) on the electronic device (e.g., the electronic device stores the plurality of software applications).

[00307] The device displays (602), on the display, a user interface for a first software application (e.g., the user interface for a settings application shown in Figure 5A). The user interface includes (604) a plurality of elements (e.g., switch object 502, slider object 504 and slider object 506) to which user interaction models from a plurality of user interaction models provided by an application-independent module have been assigned. The plurality of elements includes a first element to which a first user interaction model has been

107

DK 2016 70725 A1 assigned (e.g., slider object 502). The plurality of elements has content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application (e.g., slider object 502 includes speaker icons provided by the settings application).

[00308] In some embodiments, the device assigns (606) the first user interaction model to the first element using a predefined application programming interface (API). For example, the device assigns a particular user interaction model to the first element using an API for the application-independent software module.

[00309] The first user interaction model defines (608) how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the first element of the user interface. For example, the first user interaction model defines whether or not to generate a tactile output and/or a condition for generating the tactile output. In some embodiments, the first user interaction model also defines how the first element is visually updated in response to a user input (e.g., moving a slider thumb, flipping on or off a switch, etc.).

[00310] While displaying the user interface, the device detects (610), via the one or more input devices, an input directed to the first element of the user interface (e.g., input 509 directed to slider thumb 505 in Figure 5C).

[00311] In response to detecting the input (612), the device updates (614) the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the input (e.g., magnitude of movement, direction of movement, start location, stop location, magnitude of intensity, rate of change of intensity). For example, a position of slider thumb 505 changes in response to a change to input 509, as shown in Figure 5D.

[00312] In some embodiments, the device updates (616) the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the input and the first user interaction model.

[00313] Also in response to detecting the input (612), and in accordance with a determination that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, the device generates (618) a first tactile output corresponding to the input.

[00314] In some embodiments, the first element includes (620) a slider object (e.g., UlSlider) generated at least in part based on information provided by the applicationspecific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model

108

DK 2016 70725 A1 specifies generating tactile outputs (e.g., the first tactile output) in accordance with user manipulation of the slider object with touch inputs.

[00315] In some embodiments, the device generates (622) a predefined modulation selection tactile output in response to a touch input that selects a modulation type for the slider object. For example, in Figure 5B, a predefined tactile output is generated in response to input 503. In another example, a switch object or a list of options is configured to be used to select a modulation type for a slider object (e.g., whether the slider object is a volume slider or a balance slider), and the device generates the predefined modulation selection tactile output in response to a touch input at a location that corresponds to the switch object or the list of options.

[00316] In some embodiments, the first user interaction model specifies (624) generating the first tactile output in accordance with a modulation type of the slider object and a parameter of the first software application modulated in accordance with user manipulation of the slider object with touch inputs. For example, as shown in Figures 5C5E, in accordance with a determination that the modulation type of the slider object is a volume slider, a tactile output increases in its magnitude as a volume represented by the slider object increases. In accordance with a determination that the modulation type of the slider object is a balance slider, the balance of a tactile output is adjusted based on a location of the slider thumb as shown in Figures 5G-5H.

[00317] In some embodiments, the first user interaction model specifies (626) generating a distinct tactile output in accordance with a moveable portion of the slider object reaching an end position (e.g., in Figure 5F, distinct tactile output 513 is generated in accordance with the slider thumb reaching an end position of the slider).

[00318] In some embodiments, the first element includes (628) a switch object (e.g., UISwitch) generated at least in part based on information provided by the applicationspecific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input corresponds to an action that changes a state of the switch object (e.g., the first input causes the switch to be flipped from a prior state to a new state different from the prior state, such as from off to on or vice versa as shown in Figures 5A-5B).

109

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00319] In some embodiments, the first element includes (630) a value selection object (e.g., using a UlPickerView class or a UIDatePicker class described in Appendix B or their instances) generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input corresponds to an action that changes a value selected using the value selection object. For example, if the value selection object corresponds to a scrollable wheel or list having a sequence of different values, the device generates a sequence of tactile outputs as the first input causes the value selection objection to scroll through the sequence of different values (e.g., the wheel of time shown in Figures 5K-5O). In one example, different values in the sequence are date values, for example, values for the year, month, day, hour or minute of a specified date or time.

[00320] In some embodiments, the first element includes content that is refreshed (632) in response to a pull down gesture reaching a refresh threshold (e.g., using a UIRefreshControl class described in Appendix B or its instance). The first user interaction model specifies generating a predefined impact tactile output in accordance with a determination that the input corresponds to a pull down gesture reaching the refresh threshold (e.g., content is refreshed in response to a pull down gesture reaching a refresh threshold as shown in Figures 5P-5T).

[00321] In some embodiments, the first element includes (634) a region or object (e.g., using a UIZoomEdgeFeedbackGenerator class or a UlScrollView class described in Appendix B or their instances), the size of which changes in response to the input comprising a zoom gesture. The first user interaction model specifies generating a predefined size limit tactile output in accordance with a determination that the size of the region or object has reached a predefined limit (e.g., in accordance with a determination that the size of the region or object, or equivalently a zoom scaling factor, has reached a predefined limit). For example, the predefined size limit tactile output is generated in accordance with a determination that the size of the displayed web page has reached a predefined limit in response to a depinch gesture, as shown in Figures 5Z-5CC.

[00322] In some embodiments, the first element includes (636) a table (e.g., using a UITableView class described in Appendix B or its instance), having cells organized in rows and columns, generated at least in part based on information provided by the application110

DK 2016 70725 A1 specific module for the first software application (e.g., a calendar application provides dates and times of interest and/or calendar entries for the calendar view illustrated in Figures 5LL-5QQ). The first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input moves from any cell in the table to any other cell in the table, or moves from outside the table to a cell inside the table (e.g., an input moves from outside the table to cell 576b inside the table to select cell 576b, as shown in Figures 5LL-5MM). In some embodiments, when the first input corresponds to a drag gesture for dragging a content item, the device generates a snapping feedback tactile output when the first input moves an object into a cell in the table and the object “automatically” snaps into place in the cell, where the table is displayed by an application and the application controls or specifies the a snapping action.

[00323] In some embodiments, the first element includes (638) a table (e.g., using a UITableView class described in Appendix B or its instance), having cells organized in rows and columns, generated at least in part based on information provided by the applicationspecific module for the first software application. The first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when two or more rows of the cells are reordered in response to the input. For example, a tactile output is generated when two or more entries in a list are reordered as shown in Figure 5KK. Similarly, in some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when two or more entries in different rows are reordered in a table (e.g., by moving a calendar entry in a calendar view to another calendar entry in an adjacent row so that the two calendar entries are reordered).

[00324] In some embodiments, the input causes (640) the first software application to select an item, in a collection of distinct items (e.g., using a UlCollectionView class described in Appendix B or its instance), to be moved to a predefined position within the first element, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output in conjunction with the selected item being moved to the predefined position within the first element (e.g., a tactile output is generated when application icon 582 is moved to a predefined position, namely a position for an adjacent application icon 583 as shown in Figure 5SS). In some embodiments, the first user interaction model specifies generating one or more tactile outputs in conjunction with the selected item moving to the predefined position in accordance with a predefined snapping behavior. For example, the selected item

111

DK 2016 70725 A1 snaps into a place when a drag gesture brings the selected item within a predefined distance of a predefined snap-in-place location (e.g., a grid location in a predefined grid).

[00325] In some embodiments, the first user interaction model specifies (642) generating the first tactile output when the input or an object manipulated in accordance with the input approaches a next predefined state (e.g., a force-press gesture), and generating a second tactile output, distinct from the first tactile output, when the input or an object manipulated in accordance with the input reaches the next predefined state (e.g., in Figure 5UU, the device generates tactile output 594a when the input intensity approaches the intensity threshold Π), and generates tactile output 594b when the input intensity reaches the intensity threshold ITl). In some embodiments, the first behavior model specifies generating a sequence of distinct tactile outputs as the intensity of the first touch input reaches each of a sequence of intensity thresholds.

[00326] In accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, the device forgoes (644) generation of the first tactile output (e.g., as shown in Figure 5AA, when the size of the region or object, or equivalently a zoom scaling factor, has not reached a predefined limit, the first tactile output, such as tactile output 564 shown in Figure 5CC, is not generated).

[00327] In some embodiments, the plurality of elements includes (646) a second element to which a second user interaction model from the plurality of user interaction models provided by the application-independent module has been assigned. While displaying the user interface, the device detects, via the one or more input devices, a second input directed to the second element of the user interface; and, in response to detecting the second input directed to the second element of the user interface: updates the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the detected second input; in accordance with a determination that the second input meets tactile output criteria specified by the second user interaction model, generates a second tactile output corresponding to the second input (e.g., a tap gesture or a horizontal swipe gesture on switch object 502 flips a state of switch object 502 and initiates generation of the second tactile output indicating that the state of switch object 502 has been flipped); and, in accordance with a determination that the second input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the second user interaction model, forgoes generation of the second tactile output (e.g., a vertical swipe gesture on switch

112

DK 2016 70725 A1 object 502 does not flip the state of switch object 502 and the second tactile output is not generated).

[00328] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 6A-6D have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and 2000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 600 described above with respect to Figures 6A-6D. For example, the tactile outputs, slider objects, switch objects, value selection objects, content refreshing operations, zooming operations, scrolling operations, table manipulations, and selecting and moving user interface objects described above with reference to method 600 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the tactile outputs, slider objects, switch objects, value selection objects, content refreshing operations, zooming operations, scrolling operations, table manipulations, and selecting and moving user interface objects described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and 2000). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00329] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. For example, in accordance with some embodiments, the device displays, on the display, a user interface for a first software application. The user interface is generated by populating a first user interaction template from a plurality of user interaction templates provided by an application-independent module with content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application. The first user interaction template defines how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the user interface. While displaying the user interface, the device detects, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to the user interface. In response to detecting the input, the device updates the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the detected input (e.g., magnitude of movement, direction of movement, start location, stop location, magnitude of intensity, rate of change

113

DK 2016 70725 A1 of intensity) and the first user interaction template; in accordance with a determination that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction template, generates a first tactile output corresponding to the input; and, in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction template, forgoes generation of the first tactile output.

[00330] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures IA and 3) or application specific chips.

[00331] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 7 shows a functional block diagram of electronic device 700 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 7 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00332] As shown in Figure 7, electronic device 700 includes display unit 702 (e.g., including display 112) configured to display user interfaces, one or more input device unit(s) 704 configured to receive inputs (e.g., touch inputs on a surface, such as a display surface of display unit 702), and processing unit 708 coupled with display unit 702 and the one or more input device unit(s) 704. In some embodiments, electronic device 700 also includes one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 706 configured to generate one or more tactile outputs, also coupled to processing unit 708. In some embodiments, processing unit 708 includes one or more of the following sub-units: display enabling unit 710, detecting unit 712, tactile output enabling unit 714, assigning unit 716, and determining unit 718.

[00333] In some embodiments, processing unit 708 is configured to enable display (e.g., using display enabling unit 702), on display unit 702, of a user interface for a first software application, wherein the user interface includes a plurality of elements to which user interaction models from a plurality of user interaction models provided by an

114

DK 2016 70725 A1 application-independent module have been assigned (e.g., using assigning unit 716), the plurality of elements include a first element to which a first user interaction model has been assigned, and the plurality of elements have content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application. In some embodiments, the first user interaction model defines how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the first element of the user interface. While enabling display of the user interface, processing unit 708 is configured to detect (e.g., using detecting unit 712), via input device unit(s) 704, an input directed to the first element of the user interface. In response to detecting the input, processing unit 708 updates (e.g., using display enabling unit 710) the user interface on the display unit based on characteristics of the detected input. In accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 718) that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, processing unit 708 enables generation of a first tactile output corresponding to the input (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714). In accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 718) that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, processing unit 708 forgoes enabling generation of the first tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714).

[00334] In some embodiments, processing unit 708 updates (e.g., using display enabling unit 710) the user interface on display unit 702 based on characteristics of the detected input and the first user interaction model. In some embodiments, processing unit 708 assigns (e.g., using assigning unit 716) the first user interaction model to the first element using a predefined application programming interface (API).

[00335] In some embodiments, the plurality of elements includes a second element to which a second user interaction model from the plurality of user interaction models provided by the application-independent module has been assigned (e.g., using assigning unit 716), and while displaying the user interface, processing unit 708 detects (e.g., using detecting unit 712), via the one or more input device units 704, a second input directed to the second element of the user interface. In response to detecting the second input directed to the second element of the user interface, processing unit 708 updates (e.g., using display enabling unit 710) the user interface on the display unit based on characteristics of the detected second input. In accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 718) that the second input meets tactile output criteria specified by the second user

115

DK 2016 70725 A1 interaction model, processing unit 708 enables (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) generation of a second tactile output corresponding to the second input, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 718) that the second input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the second user interaction model, processing unit 708 forgoes enabling generation of the second tactile output.

[00336] In some embodiments, the first element includes a slider object generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating tactile outputs (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) in accordance with user manipulation of the slider object with touch inputs. In some embodiments, processing unit 708 is further configured to enable generation of a predefined modulation selection tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) in response to a touch input that selects a modulation type for the slider object.

[00337] In some embodiments, the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) in accordance with a modulation type of the slider object and a parameter of the first software application modulated in accordance with user manipulation of the slider object with touch inputs.

[00338] In some embodiments, the first user interaction model specifies generating a distinct tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) in accordance with a moveable portion of the slider object reaching an end position.

[00339] In some embodiments, the first element includes a switch object generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) when the first input corresponds to an action that changes a state of the switch object.

[00340] In some embodiments, the first element includes a value selection object generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) when the first input corresponds to an action that changes a value selected using the value selection object.

116

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00341] In some embodiments, the first element includes content that is refreshed in response to a pull down gesture reaching a refresh threshold, and the first user interaction model specifies generating a predefined impact tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 718) that the first input corresponds to a pull down gesture reaching the refresh threshold.

[00342] In some embodiments, the first element includes a region or object, the size of which changes in response to the first input comprising a zoom gesture, and the first user interaction model specifies generating a predefined size limit tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 718) that the size of the region or object has reached a predefined limit.

[00343] In some embodiments, the first element includes a table, having cells organized in rows and columns, generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) when the first input moves from any cell in the table to any other cell in the table, or moves from outside the table to a cell inside the table.

[00344] In some embodiments, the first element includes a table, having cells organized in rows and columns, generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) when two or more rows of the cells are reordered in response to the first input.

[00345] In some embodiments, the first input causes the first software application to select an item, in a collection of distinct items, to be moved to a predefined position within the first element, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) in conjunction with the selected item being moved to the predefined position within the first element.

[00346] In some embodiments, the first user interaction model specifies generating (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 714) the first tactile output when the first input or an object manipulated in accordance with the first input approaches a next predefined state, and generating a second tactile output, distinct from the first tactile output, when the first

117

DK 2016 70725 A1 input or an object manipulated in accordance with the first input reaches the next predefined state.

[00347] The operations described above with reference to Figures 6A-6D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 7. For example, detection operation 610, updating operation 614, and generating operation 618 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00348] Figures 8A-8D are flow diagrams illustrating method 800 of synchronizing tactile outputs and user interface changes in accordance with some embodiments. Method 800 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure IA) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 800 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00349] As described below, method 800 provides an intuitive way to provide tactile outputs in conjunction with user interface events. Providing tactile outputs takes longer than updating a user interface. Thus, user interface events (e.g., time-flexible user interface events) are delayed so that the delayed user interface events are synchronized with

118

DK 2016 70725 A1 generation of tactile outputs. Synchronizing generation of tactile outputs and user interface updates provides intuitive user interfaces. On the other hand, for time-critical user interface events, user interface events are not delayed, which maintains the responsiveness of the device for such time-critical user interface events. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when interacting with user interfaces, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to interact with user interfaces faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00350] The device displays (802), on the display, a user interface (e.g., user interface 5105 as illustrated for T=to in Figure 5XX).

[00351] The device detects (804) an occurrence of a first condition (e.g., a user input, a scheduled event such as an alarm or a timer, or an externally triggered event such as an incoming notification) that triggers a first user interface event that is associated with a tactile output (e.g., receiving a calendar event invitation as illustrated for T=ti in Figure 5XX). Generating the first user interface event includes (806) displaying one or more changes to the user interface (e.g., display of calendar event invitation affordance 5108 on user interface 5105 in Figure 5XX).

[00352] In some embodiments, the occurrence of the first condition includes (808) detected movement of the electronic device that meets predefined input pattem criteria (e.g., a pattern of shaking the device back and forth as illustrated in Figure 5WW for T=ti) and the one or more changes to the user interface include undoing a previously performed operation (e.g., undoing an auto-correction, redisplaying one or more deleted characters, removing one or more previously typed characters, undoing deletion of an item, and/or displaying an undo operation affordance as illustrated in Figure 5WW for T=b).

[00353] The device will not be able to generate (810) the tactile output associated with the first user interface event for a respective amount of time (e.g., due to other tactile outputs being generated and/or the tactile output generators not being ready to generate the tactile output because the tactile output generators are in a low-power state). In some embodiments, the device is not configured to generate the tactile output associated with the first user interface event for the respective amount of time (e.g., it takes at least the respective amount of time, such as Tdeiay illustrated in Figure 5WW or more, from a point of

119

DK 2016 70725 A1 time when the tactile output associated with the first user interface event is requested or initiated to when the tactile output is generated).

[00354] In response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds to a first user interface event category (812) (e.g., the first user interface event is not in response to a user input such as an alert or other notification that is not direct manipulation of the user interface in response to touch input), the device delays (814) generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time (e.g., in Figure 5WW, the device delays generating the first user interface event for Tdeiay).

[00355] In some embodiments, the device, when the respective amount of time is a first amount of time, delays (816) displaying the one or more changes to the user interface for the first amount of time, and when the respective amount of time is a second amount of time, delays displaying the one or more changes to the user interface for the second amount of time (e.g., the device delays displaying the one or more changes to the user interface based on the time it takes to generate a tactile output).

[00356] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes (818) a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event that does not correspond to a user input currently detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., receiving a calendar event invitation as illustrated for T=ti in Figure 5XX). In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is independent of any user input on the touch-sensitive surface that is detected at the same time as, or immediately preceding, the notification event.

[00357] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes (820) a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with receiving electronically delivered information from an information source external to the electronic device (e.g., receiving a calendar event invitation as illustrated for T=ti in Figure 5XX).

[00358] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes (822) a determination that the

120

DK 2016 70725 A1 first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with receiving electronically delivered information from an application executed by the electronic device (e.g., receiving a calendar event invitation as illustrated for T=ti in Figure 5XX) and independent of any user input on the touch-sensitive surface that is detected at the same time as, or immediately preceding, the notification event.

[00359] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes (824) a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with completion of a transaction initiated by a user of the electronic device (e.g., transmission of payment credentials via a short range wireless communication signal to a payment terminal such as an NFC payment, successful authorization of a payment via a biometric sensor such as a fingerprint sensor, or receiving authorization of a payment by a remote payment server as shown in Figure 5YY).

[00360] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes (826) a determination that the first user interface event is provided to an application programming interface (API) with a value indicating that the one or more changes to the user interface can be delayed until the device is ready to generate the tactile output (e.g., the first user interface event is provided from an application to the application programming interface (and to applicationindependent software module 260 illustrated in Figure ID) with information indicating whether the first user interface event is a flexible event or an inflexible event).

[00361] After delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time, the device displays (828) the one or more changes to the user interface and generating the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event. The display of the one or more changes to the user interface is synchronized (830) with the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event (e.g., so that the one or more changes to the user interface are displayed with the generation of the first tactile output as shown in Figure 5WW) (e.g., using a prepareWithCompletionHandler function described in Appendix B).

[00362] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds

121

DK 2016 70725 A1 to a second user interface event category (e.g., the first user interface event is in response to a user input, such as changes to the user interface that correspond to direct manipulation of the user interface in response to touch input), the device displays (832) the one or more changes to the user interface before the respective amount of time has elapsed and generates the tactile output that is associated with the one or more changes in the user interface after the respective amount of time has elapsed (e.g., in Figure 5VV, the one or more changes to the user interface are displayed without the delay to provide a prompt visual feedback).

[00363] In some embodiments, the first user interface event category includes (834) events where the respective amount of time for the one or more changes to the user interface is flexible (e.g., user interface events that are independent of immediately preceding user inputs). The second user interface event category includes events where the respective amount of time for the one or more changes to the user interface is inflexible (e.g., user interface events initiated by user inputs).

[00364] In some embodiments, the first user interface event category includes (836) events where the one or more changes to the user interface do not simulate direct manipulation of the user interface by user inputs (e.g., receiving a calendar event invitation as illustrated for T=ti in Figure 5XX). The second user interface event category includes events where the one or more changes to the user interface simulate direct manipulation of the user interface by user inputs (e.g., user inputs that triggered the first user interface event, such movement of a contact that corresponds to movement of a user interface object in the user interface as shown in Figure 5VV or an increase in intensity of a contact that corresponds to changing the appearance of a user interface object based on the pressure of the contact).

[00365] In some embodiments, the device detects (838) a user input on the touchsensitive surface that triggers a second user interface event that is associated with a tactile output (e.g., user input 571 in Figure 5VV). Generating the second user interface event includes displaying one or more changes to the user interface. In response to detecting the user input on the touch-sensitive surface, the device displays the one or more changes to the user interface for the second user interface event and generates the tactile output that is associated with the second user interface event (e.g., list element 572 and list element 573 are reordered in Figure 5VV and a corresponding tactile output is generated). A first time

122

DK 2016 70725 A1 interval between the display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the first user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event is less than a second time interval between the display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the second user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the second user interface event (e.g., in some embodiments, the first time interval between the display of one or more changes to the user interface for the first user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event in Figure 5WW is close to zero, and is less than the second time interval between ti and t₂ in Figure 5VV).

[00366] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 8A-8D have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and 2000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 800 described above with respect to Figures 8A-8D. For example, the tactile outputs, user interface elements, user interface events, user interface event categories, notification events, and synchronization of tactile outputs with user interface events described above with reference to method 800 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the tactile outputs, user interface elements, user interface events, user interface event categories, notification events, and synchronization of tactile outputs with user interface events described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and 2000). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00367] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures IA and 3) or application specific chips.

[00368] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 9 shows a functional block diagram of electronic device 900 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented

123

DK 2016 70725 A1 by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 9 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00369] As shown in Figure 9, electronic device 900 includes display unit 902 (e.g., including display 112) configured to display user interfaces, touch-sensitive surface unit 904 configured to receive touch inputs (e.g., on a display surface of display unit 902), one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 906 configured to generate one or more tactile outputs, and processing unit 908 coupled with display unit 902, touch-sensitive surface unit 904, and one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 906. In some embodiments, processing unit 908 includes one or more of the following sub-units: display enabling unit 910, detecting unit 912, delay unit 914, tactile output enabling unit 916, and determining unit 918.

[00370] In some embodiments, processing unit 908 is configured to enable display (e.g., using display enabling unit 910), on display unit 902, of a user interface. Processing unit 908 detects (e.g., using detecting unit 912) an occurrence of a first condition that triggers a first user interface event that is associated with a tactile output, wherein generating the first user interface event includes enabling display (e.g., using display enabling unit 910) of one or more changes to the user interface. In some embodiments, the device (e.g., device 900) will not be able to generate the tactile output (e.g., using tactile output generator units 906) associated with the first user interface event for a respective amount of time, and in response to detecting (e.g., using detecting unit 912) the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 918) that the first user interface event corresponds to a first user interface event category, processing unit 908 enables generation (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 916) and delays (e.g., using delay unit 914) generation of the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time. After delaying (e.g., using delay unit 914) generation of the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time, processing unit 908 enables display (e.g., using display enabling unit 910) of the one or more changes to the user interface, wherein the display of the one or more changes to the user interface is

124

DK 2016 70725 A1 synchronized with the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event.

[00371] In some embodiments, processing unit 908 is further configured to, when the respective amount of time is a first amount of time, delay (e.g., using delay unit 914) displaying the one or more changes to the user interface for the first amount of time, and when the respective amount of time is a second amount of time, delay (e.g., using delay unit 914) displaying the one or more changes to the user interface for the second amount of time.

[00372] In some embodiments, processing unit 908 is configured to, in response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 918) that the first user interface event corresponds to a second user interface event category, enable display of the one or more changes to the user interface (e.g., using display enabling unit 910) before the respective amount of time has elapsed, wherein the tactile output (e.g., using tactile feedback unit 918) that is associated with the one or more changes in the user interface is generated after the respective amount of time has elapsed.

[00373] In some embodiments, the first user interface event category includes events where the timing of the one or more changes to the user interface is flexible, and the second user interface event category includes events where the timing of the one or more changes to the user interface is inflexible.

[00374] In some embodiments, the first user interface event category includes events where the one or more changes to the user interface do not simulate direct manipulation of the user interface by user inputs, and the second user interface event category includes events where the one or more changes to the user interface simulate direct manipulation of the user interface by user inputs.

[00375] In some embodiments, processing unit 908 is configured to detects a user input on touch-sensitive surface unit 904 that triggers a second user interface event that is associated with a tactile output, wherein generating the second user interface event includes enabling display (e.g., using display enabling unit 910) of one or more changes to the user interface. In response to detecting the user input on touch-sensitive surface unit 904, processing unit 908 is configured to enable display (e.g., using display enabling unit 910) of the one or more changes to the user interface for the second user interface event and enable

125

DK 2016 70725 A1 generation of the tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 916) that is associated with the second user interface event, wherein a first time interval between the display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the first user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event is less than a second time interval between the display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the second user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the second user interface event.

[00376] In some embodiments, the occurrence of the first condition includes detected movement of electronic device 900 that meets predefined input pattem criteria and the one or more changes to the user interface include undoing a previously performed operation.

[00377] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 918) that the first user interface event is a notification event that does not correspond to a user input currently detected on touch-sensitive surface unit 904.

[00378] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 918) that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with receiving electronically delivered information from an information source external to electronic device 900.

[00379] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 918) that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with receiving electronically delivered information from an application executed by electronic device 900 and independent of any user input on touch-sensitive surface unit 904 that is detected at the same time as, or immediately preceding, the notification event.

[00380] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 918) that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with completion of a transaction initiated by a user of electronic device 900.

126

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00381] In some embodiments, the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 918) that the first user interface event is provided to an application programming interface (API) with a value indicating that the one or more changes to the user interface can be delayed until device 900 is ready to generate the tactile output.

[00382] The operations described above with reference to Figures 8A-8D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 9. For example, detection operation 804, delaying operation 814, and displaying and generating operation 828 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touchsensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00383] Figures 10A-10D are flow diagrams illustrating method 1000 of setting power/latency states of tactile output generators in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1000 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure IA) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 1000 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

127

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00384] As described below, method 1000 provides an enhanced way to provide tactile outputs based on states of tactile output generators. Predicting an upcoming tactile output generation event and transitioning tactile output generators into a low-latency mode reduces the latency in generating tactile outputs, which makes the device more responsive to user inputs, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For batteryoperated electronic devices, placing the tactile output generators in the low-latency mode based on prediction of upcoming tactile output generation events conserves power over maintaining the tactile output generators in the low-latency mode all the time and increases the time between battery charges.

[00385] While the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state (e.g., at operation 5182, Figure 5KKK), the device receives (1002) an indication that a user interaction has started (e.g., detecting a first portion of an input such as a touch on a touch sensitive surface or the beginning of a drag and drop operation as shown in Figure 5III, or receiving a “prepare” request from a first software application in which the user interaction has started, such as at operation 5184, Figure 5KKK).

[00386] A respective portion of the user interaction is associated (1004) with a tactile output (e.g., a portion of the user interaction that corresponds to an overlap of position indicator 5161 with marker 5162 is associated with a tactile output so that an overlap of position indicator 5161 and marker 5162 initiates a tactile output).

[00387] The low-power state is (1006) a state in which tactile outputs are generated with a first amount of latency (e.g., it will take at least a warm-up amount of time, such as ATa, Figures 5ZZ and 5HHH to generate the tactile output with the one or more tactile output generators).

[00388] In some embodiments, the low-power state is (1008) a predefined inactive state of the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., “inactive” state, Figure 5ZZ). In some embodiments, the one or more tactile output generators consume no power in the lowpower state.

[00389] In some embodiments, the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output includes (1010) location information corresponding to a touch input having a location on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a location of position indicator 5161 in Figure 5III) or a user interface object having a location on the touch-sensitive surface.

128

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00390] In some embodiments, the device determines (1012) a location of the tactile output in accordance with the location information for the user interaction (e.g., when the device includes multiple tactile output generators, the tactile output is generated using one or more tactile output generators located adjacent to the location of the user interaction).

[00391] In some embodiments, the one or more tactile output generators include (1014) two or more tactile output generators, each having a corresponding location, or location and size, and determining the location of the tactile output includes determining the location of the tactile output in accordance with the location information for the user interaction and the locations, or locations and sizes, of the two of more tactile output generators (e.g., as shown in Figures 5G-5H, the tactile output is generated at a location adjacent to a location of slider thumb 507).

[00392] In response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria (e.g., at operation 5186-Yes, Figure 5KKK), the device sets (1016) the one or more tactile output generators to a lowlatency state (e.g., a pre-warmed state has a lower latency than an inactive state, and, in some embodiments, a higher latency than a ready state) at a first time (e.g., at T=ti in Figure 5III). The low-latency state is (1018) a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency (e.g., ΔΤβ, Figures 5ZZ and 5III) that is lower than the first amount of latency (e.g., the low-latency state is a state in which it will take less than the warm-up amount of time to generate the tactile output with the one or more tactile output generators as shown in Figure 5ZZ).

[00393] In some embodiments, the low-power state of the one or more tactile output generators has (1020) a lower power consumption than the low-latency state (e.g., the lowlatency state is high-power state that consumes more power than the low-power state). The low-latency state has a lower latency for generating tactile outputs than the low-power state, as shown in Figure 5ZZ (e.g., the low-power state is high-latency state that consumes less power than the low-latency state).

[00394] In some embodiments, the low-latency state is selected (1022) from a first low-latency state (e.g., a pre-warmed state with a reduced latency, such as a latency ΔΤβ that is lower than a latency ΔΤα in the off or inactive state but is still perceptible to a user,

129

DK 2016 70725 A1 as described herein with reference to Figure 5ZZ) and a second low-latency state (e.g., a ready or active state where the one or more tactile output generators are ready to generate tactile outputs with a minimal latency, such as a latency ATc that is below the threshold at which is perceptible to a user), as described for example with reference to operation 5188 of Figure 5KKK. The first low-latency state consumes less power than the second low-latency state and has a higher latency than the second low-latency state. For example, when a lowest latency is required, the device selects the second low-latency state.

[00395] In some embodiments, the low-latency state is selected (1024) from the first low-latency state and the second low-latency state by an operating system of the device (e.g., operating system 126, Figure 1 A) based on energy conservation protocols used by the device (e.g., if the first software application has been asking to set the device into the ready state too frequently, or the device is in a battery conservation mode of operation, the operating system can decide to set the device into the pre-warmed state instead of the ready state so as to conserve power).

[00396] In some embodiments, the device issues (1026) from a first software application a command to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state. Setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state is performed in response to the command issued by the first software application to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state (e.g., information 272 from application 1 (136-1) in Figure ID includes one or more instructions and/or commands to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state).

[00397] In some embodiments, the device issues (1028) from a first software application (e.g., application 136-1, Figure ID) a command to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, and at an operating system of the electronic device, receives the issued command and makes a determination of whether to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state.

[00398] In some embodiments, the device determines (1030), using an operating system of the electronic device, when to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state (e.g., operation 5186 in Figure 5KKK).

[00399] In some embodiments, the operating system of the electronic device determines (1032) whether to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low130

DK 2016 70725 A1 latency state in accordance with a state of the electronic device (e.g., if the device is in a battery conservation mode of operation, the operating system can decide whether to set the device into the low-latency state or not, so as to conserve power).

[00400] In some embodiments, the operating system of the electronic device determines (1034), in response to a first software application issuing a command to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, whether to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state in accordance with historical information concerning prior commands by the first software application to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state (e.g., if an application requests to prepare too many times, without requesting a tactile output to be generated, the device ignores subsequent prepare requests).

[00401] After setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state (1036), in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that the one or more tactile output generators are still in the low-latency state, the device generates (1038) the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the second amount of latency (e.g., generating the tactile output takes less than the warm-up amount of time); and, in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time (e.g., a timeout period), transitions (1040) the one or more tactile output generators from the low-latency state to the low-power state (e.g., an inactive state) (e.g., using a UIFeedbackGenerator prepare function described below in Appendix A), as described for example with reference to operation 5194, Figure 5KKK.

[00402] In some embodiments, after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state (1036), the device, in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output after the predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that the one or more tactile output generators have returned to the low-power state, generates (1042) the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the first amount of latency (e.g., generating the tactile output takes at least the warm-up amount of time).

131

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00403] In some embodiments, in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication does not meet tactile output generator preparation criteria (e.g., because the device is in a battery conservation mode of operation or because the first application has been requesting that the device prepare to generate tactile outputs too frequently), the device maintains (1044) the one or more tactile output generators in the low-power state and forgoes setting the one or more tactile output generators to the lowlatency state (e.g., if the first software application has been asking to set the device into the ready state too frequently, or the device is in a battery conservation mode of operation, the operating system can ignore the request in order to conserve battery power), as described for example with reference to operation 5186-No, Figure 5KKK.

[00404] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 10A-10D have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and 2000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 1000 described above with respect to Figures 10A-10D. For example, the tactile outputs, tactile output generators, tactile output generator states, and software applications described above with reference to method 1000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the tactile outputs, tactile output generators, tactile output generator states, and software applications described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and 2000). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00405] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.

[00406] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 11 shows a functional block diagram of electronic device 1100 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally,

132

DK 2016 70725 A1 implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 11 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00407] As shown in Figure 11, electronic device 1100 includes display unit 1102 (e.g., including display 112) configured to display one or more user interfaces, touchsensitive surface unit 1104 configured to receive touch inputs (e.g., on a display surface of display unit 1102), one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1106 configured to generate one or more tactile outputs, and processing unit 1108 coupled with display unit 1102, touchsensitive surface unit 1104, and one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1106. In some embodiments, processing unit 1108 includes one or more of the following sub-units: receiving unit 1110, state setting unit 1112, determining unit 1114, tactile output enabling unit 1116, and issuing unit 1118.

[00408] In some embodiments, while one or more tactile output generator units 1106 are in a low-power state, processing unit 1108 is configured to receive (e.g., using receiving unit 1110) an indication that a user interaction has started, wherein a respective portion of the user interaction is associated with a tactile output, and the low-power state is a state in which tactile outputs are generated with a first amount of latency. In response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1114) that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, processing unit 1108 sets (e.g., using state setting unit 1112) one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to a lowlatency state at a first time, wherein the low-latency state is a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency. After setting one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1114) that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that one or more tactile output generator units 1106 are still in the low-latency state, processing unit 1108 enables generation of the tactile output using one or more tactile

133

DK 2016 70725 A1 output generator units 1106 with the second amount of latency. In accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, processing unit 1108 transitions one or more tactile output generator units 1106 from the low-latency state to the low-power state.

[00409] In some embodiments, processing unit 1108 is further configured to, after setting one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state, in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output after the predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that one or more tactile output generator units 1106 have returned to the low-power state, enable generation (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1116) of the tactile output using one or more tactile output generator units 1106 with the first amount of latency.

[00410] In some embodiments, the low-power state of one or more tactile output generator units 1106 has a lower power consumption than the low-latency state, and the low-latency state has a lower latency for generating tactile outputs than the low-power state.

[00411] In some embodiments, the low-power state is a predefined inactive state of one or more tactile output generator units 1106.

[00412] In some embodiments, the low-latency state is selected from a first lowlatency state and a second low-latency state, wherein the first low-latency state consumes less power than the second low-latency state and has a higher latency than the second lowlatency state.

[00413] In some embodiments, the low-latency state is selected from the first lowlatency state and the second low-latency state by an operating system of device 1100 based on energy conservation protocols used by device 1100.

[00414] In some embodiments, processing unit 1108 is further configured to, in response to receiving the indication (e.g., using receiving unit 1110) that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication does not meet tactile output generator preparation criteria, maintain (e.g., using state setting unit 1112) one or more tactile output generator units 1106 in the low134

DK 2016 70725 A1 power state and forgo setting one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the lowlatency state.

[00415] In some embodiments, the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output includes location information corresponding to a touch input having a location on touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 or a user interface object having a location on touchsensitive surface unit 1104.

[00416] In some embodiments, processing unit 1108 is further configured to determine a location (e.g., using determining unit 1114) of the tactile output in accordance with the location information for the user interaction.

[00417] In some embodiments, one or more tactile output generator units 1106 include two or more tactile output generator units 1106, each having a corresponding location, or location and size, and determining the location of the tactile output includes determining (e.g., using determining unit 1114) the location of the tactile output in accordance with the location information for the user interaction and the locations, or locations and sizes, of two of more tactile output generator units 1106.

[00418] In some embodiments, processing unit 1108 is further configured to issue (e.g., using issuing unit 1118) from a first software application a command to set (e.g., using state setting unit 1112) one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state, wherein setting one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state is performed in response to the command issued by the first software application to set one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state.

[00419] In some embodiments, processing unit 1108 is further configured to issue (e.g., using issuing unit 1118) a command to set (e.g., using state setting unit 1112) one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state, and receive, at an operating system of electronic device 1100, the issued command and making a determination (e.g., using determining unit 1114) of whether to set one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state.

[00420] In some embodiments, processing unit 1108 is further configured to determine (e.g., using determining unit 1114), using an operating system of electronic device 1100, when to set (e.g., using state setting unit 1112) one or more tactile output

135

DK 2016 70725 A1 generator units 1106 to the low-latency state. In some embodiments, processing unit 1108 is further configured to determine (e.g., using determining unit 1114), using the operating system of electronic device 1100, whether to set (e.g., using state setting unit 1112) one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state in accordance with a state of electronic device 1100.

[00421] In some embodiments, the operating system of electronic device 1100 determines (e.g., using determining unit 1114), in response to a first software application issuing a command to set one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state, whether to set one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state in accordance with historical information concerning prior commands by the first software application to set one or more tactile output generator units 1106 to the low-latency state.

[00422] The operations described above with reference to Figures 10A-10D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 11. For example, receiving operation 1002, setting operation 1016, and generating operation 1038 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00423] Figures 12A-12D are flow diagrams illustrating method 1200 of generating consistent tactile outputs for multiple applications in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1200 is performed (1202) at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or

136

DK 2016 70725 A1 portable multifunction device 100, Figure IA) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 1200 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00424] As described below, method 1200 provides an enhanced way to provide tactile outputs using an application-independent software module. Providing tactile outputs using application-independent software based on information from application software provides common user interface framework that provides consistent user experience when various software applications are used. Providing a common user interface frame work to the user enhances the usability of such software applications and the device executing such software applications. In turn, this enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes and/or unintended operations when operating/interacting with the device). In addition, the method reduces the size of software applications and makes execution of such software applications faster. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to use software applications faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00425] While a first type of event is associated with a first tactile output and a second type of event that is distinct from the first type of event is associated with a second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output by an application-independent module (e.g., application-independent software module 260, Figure ID), the device receives (1204) first information (e.g., information 272 indicating whether a particular operation corresponds to a success event or a failure event, Figure ID) from a first application (e.g., application 136-1, Figure ID); and, in response to receiving the first information from the first application (1206), generates a response to the first information, including: in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the first type (e.g., a success event), generating (1208) the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., a series of tactile outputs for a success event illustrated in Figure 5AAA); and, in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the second type (e.g., a failure event) that

137

DK 2016 70725 A1 is distinct from the first type, generating (1210), using the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output (e.g., a series of tactile outputs for a failure event illustrated in Figure 5BBB).

[00426] After generating the response to the first information, the device receives (1212) second information from a second application (e.g., application 136-2, Figure ID) that is distinct from the first application; and, in response to receiving the second information from the second application, generates (1214) a response to the second information, including: in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the first type, generating (1216) the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., a series of tactile outputs for a success event for an authorization of an electronic payment transaction); and, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the second type, generating (1218) the second tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., a series of tactile outputs for a failure event for a denial of an electronic payment transaction) (e.g., using a UINotificationFeedbackGenerator object (or class), including types UINotificationFeedbackTypeSuccess and

UINotificationFeedbackTypeError, as described in Appendix A).

[00427] In some embodiments, the first type of event is (1220) a success event (e.g., an event with the UIEventFeedbackTypeSuccess type, as described in Appendix A) and the second type of event is a failure event (e.g., an event with the UIEventFeedbackTypeError type, as described in Appendix A).

[00428] In some embodiments, the first information is received (1222) from an application-specific module for the first application (e.g., application 136-1, or a component of application 136-1 such as application core 270-1, Figure IE), the second information is received from an application-specific module for the second application (e.g., application 136-2, or a component of application 136-2 such as application core 270-2, Figure IE), and determining whether to generate the first tactile output or the second tactile output is performed by the application-independent module (e.g., application-independent software module 260, Figure ID, or a respective instance of application-independent software module 260, Figure IE) (e.g., in Figure IE, application core 1 (270-1) sends information indicating whether a corresponding event is a success event or a failure event, application

138

DK 2016 70725 A1 core 2 (270-2) sends information indicating whether a corresponding event is a success event or a failure event, and application independent software module 260 (or its instances) determines whether to generate the first tactile output or the second tactile output based on association of a success event and a failure event with the first tactile output and the second tactile output).

[00429] In some embodiments, generating the response to the first information includes (1224), in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of a third type (e.g., a warning event, such as a notification corresponding to display of an undo operation affordance as illustrated in Figure 5CCC) that is associated with a fifth tactile output that is different from the first tactile output and the second tactile output and that is distinct from the first type and second type, generating, using the one or more tactile output generators, the fifth tactile output that is different from the first tactile output and the second tactile output; and generating the response to the second information includes, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the third type, generating the fifth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., using a

UIEventFeedbackGenerator object (or class), including type

UIEventFeedbackTypeWarning, as described in Appendix A), as described for example with reference to Figure 5CCC.

[00430] In some embodiments, after generating the response to the first information and generating the response to the second information, the device changes (1226) the first tactile output associated with the first type of event by the application-independent module, including associating the first type of event with a third tactile output that is different from the first tactile output. For example, because the application-independent module determines which tactile output to generate for a respective type of event, by changing the association of an event type with a particular tactile output in the application-independent module, tactile outputs for multiple applications can be updated consistently. In addition, this facilitates changing tactile outputs for a particular event type as the changes need to be made only with the application-independent module instead of changing all of the applications that are configured to generate tactile outputs for the particular event type.

139

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00431] In some embodiments, after changing the tactile output associated with the first type of event by the application-independent module, the device receives (1228) third information from the first application; and, in response to receiving the third information from the first application, generating a response to the third information, including: in accordance with a determination that the third information corresponds to an application event of the first type (e.g., a success event), generating the third tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators. After generating the response to the third information, the device receives fourth information from the second application that is distinct from the first application; and, in response to receiving the fourth information from the second application, generating a response to the fourth information, including, in accordance with a determination that the fourth information corresponds to an application event of the first type (e.g., a success event), generating the third tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators. For example, once the application event of the first type (e.g., a success event) is associated with a new tactile output, namely the third tactile output, tactile outputs for the application event of the first type in both the first application and the second application are changed to match the third tactile output.

[00432] In some embodiments, the third information is received (1230) from an application-specific module for the first application (e.g., application core 1 (270-1) in Figure IE), the fourth information is received from an application-specific module for the second application (e.g., application core 2 (270-2) in Figure IE), and determining whether to generate the third tactile output (e.g., determining whether the third information and/or the fourth information correspond to an application event of the first type) is performed by the application-independent module (e.g., application independent software module 260 or its instances in Figure IE).

[00433] In some embodiments, after generating the response to the first information and generating the response to the second information, the device changes (1232) the tactile output associated with the second type of event by the application-independent module, including associating the second type of event with a fourth tactile output that is different from the second tactile output.

[00434] In some embodiments, after changing the tactile output associated with the second type of event by the application-independent module, the device receives (1234)

140

DK 2016 70725 A1 fifth information from the first application; and, in response to receiving the fifth information from the first application, generates a response to the fifth information, including, in accordance with a determination that the fifth information corresponds to an application event of the second type (e.g., a failure event), generating the fourth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators. After generating the response to the fifth information, the device receives sixth information from the second application that is distinct from the first application; and, in response to receiving the sixth information from the second application, generates a response to the sixth information, including, in accordance with a determination that the sixth information corresponds to an application event of the second type, generating the fourth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators. For example, once the application event of the second type (e.g., a failure event) is associated with a new tactile output, namely the fourth tactile output, tactile outputs for the application event of the second type in both the first application and the second application are changed to match the fourth tactile output.

[00435] In some embodiments, the fifth information is received (1236) from an application-specific module for the first application (e.g., application core 1 (270-1) in Figure IE), the sixth information is received from an application-specific module for the second application (e.g., application core 2 (270-2) in Figure IE), and determining whether to generate the fourth tactile output (e.g., determining whether the fifth information and/or the sixth information correspond to an application event of the second type) is performed by the application-independent module (e.g., application independent software module 260 or its instances in Figure IE).

[00436] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 12A-12D have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1400, 1600, 1800, and 2000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 1200 described above with respect to Figures 12A-12D. For example, the tactile outputs, information, software applications, application-independent modules, and application-specific modules described above with reference to method 1200 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of

141

DK 2016 70725 A1 the tactile outputs, information, software applications, application-independent modules, and application-specific modules described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1400, 1600, 1800, and 2000). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00437] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures IA and 3) or application specific chips.

[00438] The operations described above with reference to Figures 12A-12D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 13. For example, receiving operation 1204, generating operation 1208, receiving operation 1212, and generating operation 1214 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00439] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 13 shows a functional block diagram of electronic device 1300 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in

142

DK 2016 70725 A1 the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 13 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00440] As shown in Figure 13, electronic device 1300 includes display unit 1302 (e.g., including display 112) configured to display user interfaces, touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 configured to receive touch inputs (e.g., on a display surface of display unit 1302), one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1306 configured to generate one or more tactile outputs, and processing unit 1308 coupled with display unit 1302, touch-sensitive surface unit 1304, and one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1306. In some embodiments, processing unit 1308 includes one or more of the following sub-units: receiving unit 1310, response generation enabling unit 1312, determining unit 1314, and changing unit 1316.

[00441] In some embodiments, while a first type of event is associated with a first tactile output and a second type of event that is distinct from the first type is associated with a second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output by an applicationindependent module, processing unit 1308 is configured to receive (e.g., using receiving unit 1310) first information from a first application. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, in response to receiving the first information from the first application, enable generation of a response (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) to the first information, including, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the first information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enabling generation of the first tactile output (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) using one or more tactile output generator units 1306, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the first information corresponds to an application event of the second type that is distinct from the first type, enabling generation (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312), using one or more tactile output generator units 1306, of the second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, after enabling generation of the response to the first information, receive (e.g., using receiving unit 1310) second information from a second application that is distinct from the first application. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, in response to receiving the second information from the second application, enable generation of a response (e.g., using response generation enabling unit

143

DK 2016 70725 A1

1312) to the second information, including, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the second information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enabling generation of the first tactile output using one or more tactile output generator units 1306, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the second information corresponds to an application event of the second type, enabling generation of the second tactile output using one or more tactile output generator units 1306.

[00442] In some embodiments, processing unit 1308 is further configured to, after enabling generation of the response to the first information and enabling generation of the response to the second information, change the tactile output (e.g., using changing unit 1316) associated with the first type of event by the application-independent module, including associating the first type of event with a third tactile output that is different from the first tactile output.

[00443] In some embodiments, after changing the tactile output associated with the first type of event by the application-independent module, processing unit 1308 receives third information (e.g., using receiving unit 1310) from the first application. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, in response to receiving the third information from the first application, enable generation of a response (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) to the third information, including, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the third information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enabling generation of the third tactile output (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) using one or more tactile output generator units 1306. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, after enabling generation of the response to the third information, receive fourth information (e.g., using receiving unit 1310) from the second application that is distinct from the first application. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, in response to receiving the fourth information from the second application, enable generation of a response (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) to the fourth information, including, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the fourth information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enabling generation of the third tactile output (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) using one or more tactile output generator units 1306.

144

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00444] In some embodiments, the third information is received from an applicationspecific module for the first application, the fourth information is received from an application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the third tactile output is performed by the application-independent module.

[00445] In some embodiments, processing unit 1308 is configured to, after enabling generation of the response to the first information and enabling generation of the response to the second information, change (e.g., using changing unit 1316) the tactile output associated with the second type of event by the application-independent module, including associating the second type of event with a fourth tactile output that is different from the second tactile output.

[00446] In some embodiments, processing unit 1308 is configured to, after changing (e.g., using changing unit 1316) the tactile output associated with the second type of event by the application-independent module, receive fifth information (e.g., using receiving unit 1310) from the first application. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, in response to receiving the fifth information from the first application, enable generation of a response (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) to the fifth information, including, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the fifth information corresponds to an application event of the second type, enabling generation of the fourth tactile output (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) using one or more tactile output generator units 1306. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, after enabling generation of the response to the fifth information, receive sixth information (e.g., using receiving unit 1310) from the second application that is distinct from the first application. Processing unit 1308 is configured to, in response to receiving the sixth information from the second application, enable generation of a response (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) to the sixth information, including, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the sixth information corresponds to an application event of the second type, enabling generation of the fourth tactile output (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) using one or more tactile output generator units 1306.

[00447] In some embodiments, the fifth information is received from an applicationspecific module for the first application, the sixth information is received from an

145

DK 2016 70725 A1 application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the fourth tactile output is performed by the application-independent module.

[00448] In some embodiments, the first information is received from an applicationspecific module for the first application, the second information is received from an application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the first tactile output or the second tactile output is performed by the applicationindependent module.

[00449] In some embodiments, enabling generation of the response (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) to the first information includes, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the first information corresponds to an application event of a third type that is associated with a fifth tactile output that is different from the first tactile output and the second tactile output and that is distinct from the first type and second type, enabling generation (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312), using one or more tactile output generator units 1306, of the fifth tactile output that is different from the first tactile output and the second tactile output. In some embodiments, enabling generation of the response to the second information includes, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1314) that the second information corresponds to an application event of the third type, enabling generation (e.g., using response generation enabling unit 1312) of the fifth tactile output using one or more tactile output generator units 1306.

[00450] In some embodiments, the first type of event is a success event and the second type of event is a failure event.

[00451] Figures 14A-14B are flow diagrams illustrating method 1400 of generating tactile outputs based on information from an application-specific module in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1400 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure IA) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 1400 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

146

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00452] As described below, method 1400 provides an enhanced way to provide tactile outputs using an application-independent software module. Providing tactile outputs using application-independent software based on information from application software provides common user interface framework that provides consistent user experience when various software applications are used. Providing a common user interface frame work to the user enhances the usability of such software applications and the device executing such software applications. In addition, the method provides an intuitive way to provide tactile outputs based on physics simulation of impact events. In turn, these features enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes and/or unintended operations when operating/interacting with the device). Furthermore, the method reduces the size of software applications and makes execution of such software applications faster. For batteryoperated electronic devices, enabling a user to use software applications faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00453] The device receives (1402), at an application-independent module (e.g., application-independent software module 260, Figure ID), from an application-specific module that is associated with a first application (e.g., application 136-1, or a component of application 136-1 such as application core 270-1, Figures 1D-1E), information (e.g., information 272) about an input directed to a user interface of the first application.

[00454] An operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is (1404) associated with a tactile output pattem specified by the application-specific module.

[00455] In addition, the information about the input includes (1406) information indicating a magnitude (e.g., speed or distance) of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input, as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5DDD-5GGG.

[00456] In some embodiments, the magnitude is (1408) provided by the first application.

[00457] In some embodiments, the magnitude is (1410) provided by an operating system of the electronic device (e.g., operating system 126, Figures IA and 3). In some

147

DK 2016 70725 A1 embodiments, the magnitude provided by the operating system takes into account other tactile outputs being generated during an overlapping time period.

[00458] In response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, the device generates (1412), via the one or more tactile output generators, a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application.

[00459] The tactile output has (1414) the tactile output pattem specified by the application-specific module.

[00460] In addition, the tactile output has (1416) an amplitude determined (e.g., by the application-independent module) in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input (e.g., as provided by the application-specific module), as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5DDD-5GGG. For example, the tactile output is generated using UilmpactFeedbackGenerator.

[00461] In some embodiments, the amplitude of the tactile output is (1418) further determined in accordance with at least one of a velocity or mass of an object in a simulated collision or impact.

[00462] In some embodiments, the amplitude of the tactile output is (1420) further determined by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of one or more displayed user interface elements or one or more parameters of a touch input.

[00463] In some embodiments, the tactile output is (1422) further characterized by a vibration frequency, wherein the vibration frequency is selected based on the tactile output pattem.

[00464] In some embodiments, the vibration frequency is (1424) less than 100 hertz.

[00465] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 14A-14B have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 1800,

148

DK 2016 70725 A1 and 2000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 1400 described above with respect to Figures 14A-14B. For example, the tactile outputs, user interface operations, magnitudes, amplitudes, and frequencies described above with reference to method 1400 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the tactile outputs, user interface operations, magnitudes, amplitudes, and frequencies described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 1800, and 2000). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00466] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures IA and 3) or application specific chips.

[00467] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 15 shows a functional block diagram of electronic device 1500 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 15 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00468] As shown in Figure 15, electronic device 1500 includes display unit 1502 (e.g., including display 112) configured to display user interfaces, touch-sensitive surface unit 1504 configured to receive touch inputs (e.g., on a surface, such as a display surface of display unit 1502), one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1506 configured to generate one or more tactile outputs, and processing unit 1508 coupled with display unit 1502, touchsensitive surface unit 1504, and one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1506. In some embodiments, processing unit 1508 includes one or more of the following sub-units: receiving unit 1510, tactile output enabling unit 1512, and determining unit 1514.

[00469] In some embodiments, processing unit 1508 is configured to receive (e.g., using receiving unit 1510), at an application-independent module, from an applicationspecific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input

149

DK 2016 70725 A1 directed to the user interface of the first application, wherein an operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattem specified by the application-specific module, and the information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input. Processing unit 1508 is configured to, in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, enable generation (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1512), via one or more tactile output generator units 1506, of a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application, wherein the tactile output has the tactile output pattem specified by the application-specific module, and the tactile output has an amplitude determined in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input.

[00470] In some embodiments, the tactile output is further characterized by a vibration frequency, wherein the vibration frequency is selected based on the tactile output pattern. In some embodiments, the vibration frequency is less than 100 hertz. In some embodiments, the amplitude of the tactile output is further determined (e.g., using determining unit 1514) in accordance with at least one of a velocity or mass of an object in a simulated collision or impact. In some embodiments, the amplitude of the tactile output is further determined (e.g., using determining unit 1514) by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of one or more displayed user interface elements or one or more parameters of a touch input. In some embodiments, the magnitude is provided by the application. In some embodiments, the magnitude is provided by an operating system of electronic device 1500.

[00471] The operations described above with reference to Figures 14A-14B are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 15. For example, receiving operation 1402 and generating operation 1412 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touchsensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or

150

DK 2016 70725 A1 sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00472] Figures 16A-16D are flow diagrams illustrating method 1600 of setting power/latency states of tactile output generators based on user interaction events in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1600 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 1600 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00473] As described below, method 1600 provides an enhanced way to provide tactile outputs based on states of tactile output generators. Predicting an upcoming tactile output generation event and transitioning tactile output generators into a low-latency mode reduces the latency in generating tactile outputs, which makes the device more responsive to user inputs, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For batteryoperated electronic devices, placing the tactile output generators in the low-latency mode based on prediction of upcoming tactile output generation events conserves power over maintaining the tactile output generators in the low-latency mode all the time and increases the time between battery charges.

[00474] The device displays (1602) a user interface on the display.

[00475] While displaying the user interface on the display and while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state (e.g., inactive, Figures 5ZZ and 5HHH), the device detects (1604) a first user interaction via the touch-sensitive surface.

151

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00476] In some embodiments, the first user interaction is (1606) touchdown of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface.

[00477] In some embodiments, the first user interaction is (1608) a change in a contact after detecting touchdown of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.

[00478] In response to detecting the first user interaction, the device sets (1610) the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state (e.g., pre-warm or active, Figure 5ZZ), as described in further detail herein with reference to Figure 5III. In some embodiments, the tactile output generators are set to the low-latency state based on a determination that the first user interaction is one that potentially corresponds to a sequence of input events (e.g., a drag and drop input) that are associated with tactile outputs. For example, in some embodiments the tactile output generators are set to the low-latency state as described herein with reference to method 1000.

[00479] After setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, the device detects (1612) a second user interaction that is part of a same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction (e.g., the first user interaction and the second user interaction correspond to a same continuously detected contact or set of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface).

[00480] In response to detecting the second user interaction, the device generates (1614) a tactile output that corresponds to the second user interaction (e.g., using a UIFeedbackGenerator Prepare function or a UIFeedbackGeneratorUserlnteractionDriven option as described in Appendix B).

[00481] Referring again to operation 1612, in some embodiments, the first user interaction and the second user interaction are (1616) detected as part of a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., during which the touch input remains in contact with the touch-sensitive surface) that traverses a sequence of components of the user interface displayed on the display.

[00482] In some embodiments, the device scrolls (1618) a set of menu items in response to user input on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the sequence of user interactions comprises a sequence of respective menu items in the set of menu items

152

DK 2016 70725 A1 scrolling to or through a selection position in the user interface (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5I-5J).

[00483] In some embodiments, the device scrolls (1620) a set of date component or time component items in response to user input on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the sequence of user interactions comprises a sequence of date component or time component items scrolling to or through a selection position in the user interface (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5K-5O).

[00484] Referring again to operation 1614, in some embodiments, a monitoring function tracks (1622) a progress of the sequence of user interactions. The one or more tactile output generators are changed to the low-latency state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a start state in which the monitoring function has started monitoring the sequence of user interactions. In addition, the tactile output is generated based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a changed state (e.g., a changed state for or with respect to the sequence of user interactions).

[00485] In some embodiments, a monitoring function tracks (1624) a progress of the sequence of user interactions. The one or more tactile output generators are changed to the low-latency state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a changed state that precedes a changed state that corresponds to a tactile output (e.g., a changed state indicating movement of the contact). In addition, the tactile output is generated based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered the changed state that corresponds to a tactile output (e.g., a changed state indicating movement of the contact over a boundary or to a new drop target).

[00486] In some embodiments, the sequence of user interactions corresponds (1626) to a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface that traverses a sequence of components of a user interface displayed on the display, and the device generates a sequence of two or more tactile outputs using identical waveforms (e.g., using UIRetargetFeedbackGenerator).

[00487] In some embodiments, the sequence of user interactions corresponds (1628) to a touch input on the touch-sensitive surface that traverses a sequence of soft keys (e.g., keys for selecting different versions of a same letter or character, such as a letter (e.g., “e”) with different diacritical marks) displayed on the display, and the device generates one or

153

DK 2016 70725 A1 more tactile outputs that correspond to the touch input reaching predefined positions with respect to the sequence of soft keys (e.g., leading edges, or central positions, or both, of the keys).

[00488] In some embodiments, the sequence of user interactions includes (1630) a sequence of events corresponding to distinct phases of dragging an object, in the user interface displayed on the display, from an initial location to another location (e.g., using a UIDragFeedbackGenerator object), as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5LL-5QQ.

[00489] In some embodiments, the distinct phases of dragging the object include (1632) an object lifting phase and an object dropping phase. In some embodiments, in response to a first respective user interaction, in the sequence of user interactions, the first respective user interaction corresponding to the object lifting phase, the device sets one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, and in response to a second respective user interaction, in the sequence of user interactions, the second respective user interaction corresponding to the object dropping phase, the device sets one or more tactile output generators to the low-power state (e.g., as described herein with reference to method 1000).

[00490] In some embodiments, the distinct phases of dragging the object include (1634) an object snapping phase, corresponding to the object snapping into place with respect to a user interface feature (e.g., a grid or an array, as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5RR-5SS), and the tactile output corresponds to the object snapping into place with respect to the user interface feature. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated in accordance with an object snapping into place with respect to a user interface feature without regard to whether the object snapping into place corresponds to an object snapping phase of a sequence of distinct phases of dragging the object.

[00491] In some embodiments, after generating the tactile output in response to detecting the second user interaction, the device forgoes (1636) generation of a subsequent tactile output in response to detecting a third user interaction that is part of the same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction and the second user interaction, in accordance with a determination that the third user interaction occurred less than a

154

DK 2016 70725 A1 predefined time duration from the second user interaction (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5K-5O and 5JJJ, and method 1800).

[00492] In some embodiments, the device detects (1638) an end of the sequence of user interactions. In response to detecting the end of the sequence of user interactions, the device sets the one or more tactile output generators to the low-power state.

[00493] In some embodiments, a monitoring function tracks (1640) a progress of the sequence of user interactions, and the one or more tactile output generators are set to the low-power state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered an end state (e.g., an end state for, or with respect to, the sequence of user interactions).

[00494] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 16A-16D have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1800, and 2000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 1600 described above with respect to Figures 16A-16D. For example, the tactile outputs, tactile output generators, tactile output generator states, user interactions, user interface elements, and user interface manipulations described above with reference to method 1600 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the tactile outputs, tactile output generators, tactile output generator states, user interactions, user interface elements, and user interface manipulations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1800, and 2000). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00495] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures IA and 3) or application specific chips.

[00496] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 17 shows a functional block diagram of electronic device 1700 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out

155

DK 2016 70725 A1 the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 17 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00497] As shown in Figure 17, electronic device 1700 includes display unit 1702 (e.g., including display 112) configured to display user interfaces, touch-sensitive surface unit 1704 configured to receive touch inputs (e.g., on a surface, such as a display surface of display unit 1702), one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1706 configured to generate one or more tactile outputs, and processing unit 1708 coupled with display unit 1702, touchsensitive surface unit 1704, and one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1706. In some embodiments, processing unit 1708 includes one or more of the following sub-units: display enabling unit 1710, detecting unit 1712, state setting unit 1714, tactile output enabling unit 1716, determining unit 1718, and scroll enabling unit 1720.

[00498] In some embodiments, processing unit 1708 is configured to enable display (e.g., using display enabling unit 1710) of a user interface on display unit 1702. While enabling display of the user interface on display unit 1702 and while one or more tactile output generator units 1706 are in a low-power state, processing unit 1708 detects (e.g., using detecting unit 1712) a first user interaction via touch-sensitive surface unit 1704. Processing unit 1708 is configured to, in response to detecting the first user interaction, set one or more tactile output generator units 1706 to a low-latency state (e.g., using state setting unit 1714). Processing unit 1708 is configured to, after setting one or more tactile output generator units 1706 to the low-latency state, detect (e.g., using detecting unit 1712) a second user interaction that is part of a same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction. Processing unit 1708 is configured to, in response to detecting the second user interaction, enable generation of a tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1716) that corresponds to the second user interaction.

[00499] In some embodiments, the first user interaction and the second user interaction are detected as part of a continuous touch input on touch-sensitive surface unit 1704 that traverses a sequence of components of the user interface displayed on display unit 1702.

156

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00500] In some embodiments, the first user interaction is touchdown of a contact on touch-sensitive surface unit 1704. In some embodiments, the first user interaction is a change in a contact after detecting touchdown of the contact on touch-sensitive surface unit 1704.

[00501] In some embodiments, a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions. One or more tactile output generator units 1706 are changed (e.g., using state setting unit 1714) to the low-latency state based on a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1718) that the monitoring function has entered a start state in which the monitoring function has started monitoring the sequence of user interactions, and the tactile output is generated (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1716) based on a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1718) that the monitoring function has entered a changed state.

[00502] In some embodiments, a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions. One or more tactile output generator units 1706 are changed (e.g., using state setting unit 1714) to the low-latency state based on a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1718) that the monitoring function has entered a changed state that precedes a changed state that corresponds to a tactile output, and the tactile output is generated (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1716) based on a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1718) that the monitoring function has entered the changed state that corresponds to a tactile output.

[00503] In some embodiments, processing unit 1708 is further configured to detect (e.g., using detecting unit 1712) an end of the sequence of user interactions. Processing unit 1708 is configured to, in response to detecting the end of the sequence of user interactions, set one or more tactile output generator units 1706 to the low-power state (e.g., using state setting unit 1714).

[00504] In some embodiments, a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions, and one or more tactile output generator units 1706 are set (e.g., using state setting unit 1714) to the low-power state based on a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1718) that the monitoring function has entered an end state.

[00505] In some embodiments, the sequence of user interactions corresponds to a continuous touch input on touch-sensitive surface unit 1704 that traverses a sequence of

157

DK 2016 70725 A1 components of a user interface displayed on display unit 1702, and processing unit 1708 is further configured to enable generation of a sequence of two or more tactile outputs (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1716) using identical waveforms.

[00506] In some embodiments, processing unit 1708 is configured to, after enabling generation of the tactile output in response to detecting the second user interaction, forgo generation of a subsequent tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1716) in response to detecting (e.g., using detecting unit 1712) a third user interaction that is part of the same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction and the second user interaction, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1718) that the third user interaction occurred less than a predefined time duration from the second user interaction.

[00507] In some embodiments, processing unit 1708 enables scrolling of a set of menu items (e.g., using scroll enabling unit 1720) in response to user input on touchsensitive surface unit 1704, wherein the sequence of user interactions comprises a sequence of respective menu items in the set of menu items scrolling to or through a selection position in the user interface.

[00508] In some embodiments, processing unit 1708 enables scrolling a set of date component or time component items (e.g., using scroll enabling unit 1720) in response to user input on touch-sensitive surface unit 1704, wherein the sequence of user interactions comprises a sequence of date component or time component items scrolling to or through a selection position in the user interface.

[00509] In some embodiments, the sequence of user interactions corresponds to a touch input on touch-sensitive surface unit 1704 that traverses a sequence of soft keys displayed on display unit 1702, and processing unit 1708 enables generation of one or more tactile outputs (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1716) that correspond to the touch input reaching predefined positions with respect to the sequence of soft keys.

[00510] In some embodiments, the sequence of user interactions includes a sequence of events corresponding to distinct phases of dragging an object, in the user interface displayed on display unit 1702, from an initial location to another location. In some embodiments, the distinct phases of dragging the object include an object lifting phase and an object dropping phase. In some embodiments, the distinct phases of dragging the object

158

DK 2016 70725 A1 include an object snapping phase, corresponding to the object snapping into place with respect to a user interface feature, and the tactile output corresponds to the object snapping into place with respect to the user interface feature.

[00511] The operations described above with reference to Figures 16A-16D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 17. For example, detecting operation 1604, setting operation 1610, and generating operation 1614 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00512] Figures 18A-18C are flow diagrams illustrating method 1800 of conditionally generating tactile outputs based on a time interval from a previous tactile output generation in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1800 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure IA) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touchscreen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 1800 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

159

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00513] As described below, method 1800 provides an enhanced way to provide tactile outputs based on time intervals. Forgoing generation of tactile outputs based on time intervals from preceding tactile outputs reduces excessive generation of tactile outputs, thereby protecting tactile output generators. In addition, forgoing generation of tactile outputs based on time intervals from preceding tactile outputs reduces overloading the user with tactile outputs, thereby allowing the user to focus on more important tactile outputs. Thus, this protects the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by providing more important tactile outputs and reducing user mistakes and/or unintended operations when operating/interacting with the device).

[00514] The device receives (1802) a first request for a first user interface operation.

[00515] The first user interface operation is (1804) a first type of change in a respective user interface element that is associated with a first tactile output.

[00516] In response to receiving the first request (1806), the device performs (1808) the first user interface operation, and generates (1810) the first tactile output.

[00517] After performing the first user interface operation, the device receives (1812) a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output.

[00518] In response to receiving the second request (1814), in accordance with a determination (1816) that the second request for the second user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with the second tactile output, the operations described as followed are performed (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to Figure 5JJJ).

[00519] The device determines (1818) a time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the second request. In some embodiments, the time interval is measured from request times for the tactile outputs, times associated with user interface changes, or tactile output times (actual and projected).

160

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00520] In accordance with a determination (1820) that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, the device performs the second user interface operation without generating the second tactile output (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to the requests and tactile outputs in tactile output graph 5170a, Figure 5JJJ).

[00521] In some embodiments, the time interval is (1822) determined from a beginning of the tactile output generated for the most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element to a beginning of the second tactile output. In some embodiments, the predefined time period is longer than a duration of the tactile output generated for the most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element.

[00522] In accordance with a determination (1824) that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, the device performs the second user interface operation and generates the second tactile output (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to the requests and tactile outputs in tactile output graph 5170a, Figure 5JJJ).

[00523] In some embodiments, in accordance (1826) a determination that the second request for the second user interface operation does not comprise a request for an instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element, the device mixes the second tactile output with other tactile outputs generated by the one or more tactile output generators without regard to whether the time interval is less than the predefined time period (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to the requests and tactile outputs in tactile output graph 5170b, Figure 5JJJ).

[00524] In some embodiments, after performing the second user interface operation, the device receives (1828) a third request for a third user interface operation that is associated with a third tactile output. In response to receiving the third request for the third user interface operation, in accordance with a determination that the third request for the third user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with a third tactile output, the device determines a second time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the third request. In accordance with a determination

161

DK 2016 70725 A1 that the second time interval is less than the predefined time period, the device performs the third user interface operation without generating the third tactile output. In accordance with a determination that the second time interval is greater than the predefined time period, the device performs the third user interface operation and generates the third tactile output.

[00525] In some embodiments, the first and third tactile outputs are (1830) synchronized with first and third user interactions in a sequence of user interactions that correspond to a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., traversing a sequence of user interface elements, such as a sequence of menu items, date or time component items, or soft keys, in response to a continuous touch input). In some embodiments, the first, second, and third tactile outputs correspond to first, second, and third elements, respectively, in the sequence. In some embodiments, generation of a respective tactile output is synchronized with the continuous touch input traversing the corresponding respective user interface element. In some embodiments, however, if the input traverses the sequence too quickly, one or more of the tactile outputs are not generated. In some embodiments, even if, for example, the second tactile output is not generated, generation of the first and third tactile outputs is synchronized with the continuous touch input traversing the first and third element, respectively (e.g., without regard to whether the second tactile output is generated).

[00526] In some embodiments, in response to receiving the third request (1832), in accordance with a determination that the third request for the third user interface operation does not comprise an instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element, the device mixes the third tactile output with other tactile outputs generated by the one or more tactile output generators without regard to whether the second time interval is less than the predefined time period (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to the requests and tactile outputs in tactile output graphs 5170a and 5170b, Figure 5JJJ).

[00527] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 18A-18C have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600,

162

DK 2016 70725 A1 and 2000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 1800 described above with respect to Figures 18A-18C. For example, the user interface elements, user interface operations, and tactile outputs, described above with reference to method 1800 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the user interface elements, user interface operations, and tactile outputs described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, and 2000). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00528] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures IA and 3) or application specific chips.

[00529] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 19 shows a functional block diagram of electronic device 1900 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 19 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00530] As shown in Figure 19, electronic device 1900 includes display unit 1902 (e.g., including display 112) configured to display user interfaces, touch-sensitive surface unit 1904 configured to receive touch inputs (e.g., on a surface, such as a display surface of display unit 1902), one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1906 configured to generate one or more tactile outputs, and processing unit 1908 coupled with display unit 1902, touchsensitive surface unit 1904, and one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 1906. In some embodiments, processing unit 1908 includes one or more of the following sub-units: receiving unit 1910, performing unit 1912, tactile output enabling unit 1914, determining unit 1916, mixing unit 1918, and synchronizing unit 1920.

[00531] In some embodiments, processing unit 1908 is configured to receive (e.g., using receiving unit 1910) a first request for a first user interface operation, wherein the first

163

DK 2016 70725 A1 user interface operation is a first type of change in a respective user interface element that is associated with a first tactile output. Processing unit 1908 is configured to, in response to receiving the first request, perform (e.g., using performing unit 1912) the first user interface operation, and enable generation of the first tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1914). Processing unit 1908 is configured to, after performing the first user interface operation, receive (e.g., using receiving unit 1910) a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output. Processing unit 1908 is configured to, in response to receiving the second request, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1916) that the second request for the second user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with a second tactile output, determine a time interval (e.g., using determining unit 1916) from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the second request. Processing unit 1908 is configured to, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1916) that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, perform the second user interface operation (e.g., using performing unit 1912) without enabling generation of the second tactile output; and, in accordance with a determination that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, perform the second user interface operation (e.g., using performing unit 1912) and enable generation of the second tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1914).

[00532] In some embodiments, the time interval is determined (e.g., using determining unit 1916) from a beginning of the tactile output generated for the most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element to a beginning of the second tactile output, and the predefined time period is longer than a duration of the tactile output generated for the most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element.

[00533] In some embodiments, processing unit 1908 is configured to, in response to receiving the second request, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1916) that the second request for the second user interface operation does not comprise a request for an instance of the first type of change in the respective user

164

DK 2016 70725 A1 interface element, mix (e.g., using mixing unit 1918 and/or tactile output enabling unit 1914) the second tactile output with other tactile outputs generated by one or moretactile output generator units 1906 without regard to whether the time interval is less than the predefined time period.

[00534] In some embodiments, processing unit 1908 is configured to, after performing the second user interface operation, receive (e.g., using receiving unit 1910) a third request for third user interface operation that is associated with a third tactile output. Processing unit 1908 is configured to, in response to receiving the third request for a third user interface operation, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1916) that the third request for the third user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with a third tactile output, determine (e.g., using determining unit 1916) a second time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the third request. Processing unit 1908 is configured to, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1916) that the second time interval is less than the predefined time period, perform the third user interface operation (e.g., using performing unit 1912) without enabling generation of the third tactile output. Processing unit 1908 is configured to, in accordance with a determination (e.g., made using determining unit 1916) that the second time interval is greater than the predefined time period, perform the third user interface operation (e.g., using performing unit 1912) and enable generation of the third tactile output (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 1914).

[00535] In some embodiments, processing unit 1908 is configured to, in response to receiving the third request, in accordance with a determination that the third request for the third user interface operation does not comprise an instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element, mix (e.g., using mixing unit 1918 and/or tactile output enabling unit 1914) the third tactile output with other tactile outputs generated by one or more tactile output generator units 1906 without regard to whether the second time interval is less than the predefined time period.

165

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00536] In some embodiments, the first and third tactile outputs are synchronized (e.g., using synchronizing unit 1920, mixing unit 1918, and/or tactile output enabling unit 1914) with first and third user interactions in a sequence of user interactions that correspond to a continuous touch input on touch-sensitive surface unit 1904.

[00537] The operations described above with reference to Figures 18A-18C are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 19. For example, receiving operation 1802, performing operation 1808, and generating operation 1810 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00538] Figures 20A-20B are flow diagrams illustrating method 2000 of generating tactile outputs based on a magnitude of an input and dimensions of a user interface element in accordance with some embodiments. Method 2000 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure IA) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 2000 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

166

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00539] As described below, method 2000 provides an enhanced way to provide tactile outputs using an application-independent software module. Providing tactile outputs using application-independent software based on information from application software provides common user interface framework that provides consistent user experience when various software applications are used. Providing a common user interface frame work to the user enhances the usability of such software applications and the device executing such software applications. In addition, method 2000 provides an intuitive way to provide tactile outputs based on a magnitude of an input. Tactile outputs based on the magnitude of the input conform to user expectations for tactile outputs. In turn, these features enhance the operability of the device and make the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes and/or unintended operations when operating/interacting with the device). In addition, the method reduces the size of software applications and makes execution of such software applications faster. For batteryoperated electronic devices, enabling a user to use software applications faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00540] The device receives (2002), at an application-independent module (e.g., application-independent software module 260, Figure ID), user interface information (e.g., information 272, Figure ID) from an application.

[00541] In some embodiments, the application-independent module comprises (2004), or is included in, an operating system of the electronic device (e.g., operating system 126, Figures 1A and 3).

[00542] The user interface information corresponds (2006) to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an application-specific module of the application.

[00543] In some embodiments, the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include (2008) an extent of a user interface element and an extent that the user interface element can be temporarily scrolled beyond an edge of a display region (e.g., an edge of the display), as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5P-5Y. For example, the scrolling beyond the edge of the display region is maintained until the end of the input that caused the scrolling beyond the edge of the display region or is based on simulated momentum of the user interface element in response to an input with velocity in

167

DK 2016 70725 A1 the direction of scrolling, at which point the user interface element scrolls back so that the user interface element is completely within the display region. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element reaches the minimum zoom size. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element reaches the amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the minimum zoom size. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element snaps back to the minimum zoom size after being zoomed beyond the minimum zoom size.

[00544] In some embodiments, the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include (2010) a maximum zoom size of a user interface element and an amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the maximum zoom size (e.g., the zooming beyond the maximum zoom size is maintained until the end of the input that caused the zooming beyond the maximum zoom size, at which point the user interface element returns to the maximum zoom size). In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element reaches the maximum zoom size, as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5Z-5EE. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element reaches the amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the maximum zoom size. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element snaps back to the maximum zoom size after being zoomed beyond the maximum zoom size.

[00545] In some embodiments, the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include (2012) a minimum zoom size of a user interface element and an amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the minimum zoom size (e.g., the zooming beyond the minimum zoom size is maintained until the end of the input that caused the zooming beyond the minimum zoom size, at which point the user interface element returns to the minimum zoom size). In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element reaches the minimum zoom size, as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5F-5I. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element reaches the amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the minimum zoom size. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when the user interface element snaps back to the minimum zoom size after being zoomed beyond the minimum zoom size.

168

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00546] Next, the device receives (2014) an input directed toward one or more of the displayed user interface elements (e.g., corresponding to changes in a position of a user input). In some embodiments, the device detects changes in the position of the input by receiving them from an application or from other channel(s) (e.g., a module that is updating the Ul for the application).

[00547] Next, the device determines (2016), at the application-independent module, one or more tactile outputs to be generated based on a magnitude (e.g., distance, velocity, intensity, etc.) of the input and the one or more dimensions defined by the applicationsspecific module. In some embodiments, the device determines the one or more tactile outputs in accordance with changes to a position or scale of one or more of the displayed user interface elements, based on a magnitude (or more generally a parameter) of the input.

[00548] Next, the device generates (2018), using the one or more tactile output generators, the determined one or more tactile outputs (e.g., using a UIEdgeFeedbackGenerator class described in Appendix B or its instance).

[00549] In some embodiments, the application-independent module determines (2020) a magnitude of the one or more tactile outputs by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of the received input (e.g., a magnitude of the velocity of the input).

[00550] In some embodiments, the application-independent module determines (2022) whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether an edge of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined boundary (e.g., as described in further detail herein with reference to Figures 5P-5II and 5NN-5PP).

[00551] In some embodiments, the application-independent module determines (2024) whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether a parameter (e.g., size) of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined limit.

[00552] In some embodiments, the application-independent module determines (2026) whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether an edge of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined boundary, and whether a respective user touch input is detected (e.g., scrolling with a rubber band effect while a contact is detected, or performing a zoom in or zoom out operation while a contact is detected).

169

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00553] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 20A-20B have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, and 1800) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 2000 described above with respect to Figures 20A-20B. For example, the tactile outputs, user interface elements, user interface operations, user interface information, software applications, applicationindependent modules, magnitudes of tactile outputs described above with reference to method 2000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the tactile outputs, user interface elements, user interface operations, user interface information, software applications, application-independent modules, magnitudes of tactile outputs described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, and 1800). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00554] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures IA and 3) or application specific chips.

[00555] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 21 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 2100 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 21 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00556] As shown in Figure 21, an electronic device 2100 includes display unit 2102 (e.g., corresponding to display 112) configured to display user interfaces, touch-sensitive surface unit 2104 configured to receive touch inputs (e.g., on a surface, such as a display

170

DK 2016 70725 A1 surface of display unit 2102), one or more tactile output generator unit(s) 2106 configured to generate one or more tactile outputs, and processing unit 2108 coupled with display unit 2102, the touch-sensitive surface unit 2104, and the tactile output generator unit(s) 2106. In some embodiments, processing unit 2108 includes one or more of the following sub-units: information receiving unit 2110, input receiving unit 211, determining unit 2114, and tactile output enabling unit 2116.

[00557] In some embodiments, processing unit 2108 is configured to receive, at an application-independent module, user interface information from an application (e.g., using information receiving unit 2110), wherein the user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an application-specific module of the application. Processing unit 2108 is configured to receive (e.g., using input receiving unit 2112) an input directed toward one or more of the displayed user interface elements. Processing unit 2108 is configured to determine, at the applicationindependent module, one or more tactile outputs to be generated based on a magnitude of the input and the one or more dimensions defined by the applications-specific module (e.g., using determining unit 2114), and enable generation (e.g., using tactile output enabling unit 2116) of the determined one or more tactile outputs using one or more tactile output generator units 2106.

[00558] In some embodiments, the application-independent module comprises, or is included in, an operating system of electronic device 2100. In some embodiments, the application-independent module determines a magnitude of the one or more tactile outputs by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of the received input.

[00559] In some embodiments, the application-independent module determines (e.g., using determining unit 2114) whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether an edge of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined boundary. In some embodiments, the application-independent module determines (e.g., using determining unit 2114) whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether a parameter of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined limit. In some embodiments, the application-independent module determines (e.g., using determining unit 2114) whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether an edge of a respective element, of the displayed user

171

DK 2016 70725 A1 interface elements, has passed a predefined boundary, and whether a respective user touch input is detected.

[00560] In some embodiments, the dimensions of the user interface elements include an extent of a user interface element and an extent that the user interface element can be temporarily scrolled beyond an edge of a display region. In some embodiments, the dimensions of the user interface elements include a maximum zoom size of a user interface element and an amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the maximum zoom size. In some embodiments, the dimensions of the user interface elements include a minimum zoom size of a user interface element and an amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the minimum zoom size.

[00561] The operations described above with reference to Figures 20A-20B are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 21. For example, receiving operation 2002, determining operation 2016, and generating operation 2018 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

172

DK 2016 70725 A1 [00562] Exemplary methods, electronic devices, graphical user interfaces, information processing apparatuses and computer-readable storage media are set out in the following items 1 to 254.

1. A method, comprising:

at an electronic device with a display, one or more input devices, and one or more tactile output generators:

displaying, on the display, a user interface for a first software application, wherein: the user interface includes a plurality of elements to which user interaction models from a plurality of user interaction models provided by an application-independent module have been assigned, the plurality of elements including a first element to which a first user interaction model has been assigned, the plurality of elements having content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application; and the first user interaction model defines how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the first element of the user interface;

while displaying the user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to the first element of the user interface; and in response to detecting the input:

updating the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the input; and in accordance with a determination that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, generating a first tactile output corresponding to the input; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, forgoing generation of the first tactile output.

2. The method of item 1, including updating the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the input and the first user interaction model.

3. The method of any of items 1-2, including:

assigning the first user interaction model to the first element using a predefined application programming interface (API).

173

DK 2016 70725 A1

4. The method of any of items 1-3, wherein the plurality of elements includes a second element to which a second user interaction model from the plurality of user interaction models provided by the application-independent module has been assigned, and the method includes:

while displaying the user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second input directed to the second element of the user interface; and, in response to detecting the second input directed to the second element of the user interface:

updating the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the detected second input; and in accordance with a determination that the second input meets tactile output criteria specified by the second user interaction model, generating a second tactile output corresponding to the second input; and in accordance with a determination that the second input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the second user interaction model, forgoing generation of the second tactile output.

5. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the first element includes a slider object generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating tactile outputs in accordance with user manipulation of the slider object with touch inputs.

6. The method of item 5, including generating a predefined modulation selection tactile output in response to a touch input that selects a modulation type for the slider object.

7. The method of item 5, wherein the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output in accordance with a modulation type of the slider object and a parameter of the first software application modulated in accordance with user manipulation of the slider object with touch inputs.

8. The method of item 5, wherein the first user interaction model specifies generating a distinct tactile output in accordance with a moveable portion of the slider object reaching an end position.

174

DK 2016 70725 A1

9. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the first element includes a switch object generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input corresponds to an action that changes a state of the switch object.

10. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the first element includes a value selection object generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input corresponds to an action that changes a value selected using the value selection object.

11. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the first element includes content that is refreshed in response to a pull down gesture reaching a refresh threshold, and the first user interaction model specifies generating a predefined impact tactile output in accordance with a determination that the input corresponds to a pull down gesture reaching the refresh threshold.

12. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the first element includes a region or object, the size of which changes in response to the input comprising a zoom gesture, and the first user interaction model specifies generating a predefined size limit tactile output in accordance with a determination that the size of the region or object has reached a predefined limit.

13. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the first element includes a table, having cells organized in rows and columns, generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input moves from any cell in the table to any other cell in the table, or moves from outside the table to a cell inside the table.

14. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the first element includes a table, having cells organized in rows and columns, generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first

175

DK 2016 70725 A1 user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when two or more rows of the cells are reordered in response to the input.

15. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the input causes the first software application to select an item, in a collection of distinct items, to be moved to a predefined position within the first element, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output in conjunction with the selected item being moved to the predefined position within the first element.

16. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input or an object manipulated in accordance with the input approaches a next predefined state, and generating a second tactile output, distinct from the first tactile output, when the input or an object manipulated in accordance with the input reaches the next predefined state.

17. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

one or more input devices;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:

displaying, on the display, a user interface for a first software application, wherein:

the user interface includes a plurality of elements to which user interaction models from a plurality of user interaction models provided by an applicationindependent module have been assigned, the plurality of elements including a first element to which a first user interaction model has been assigned, the plurality of elements having content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application; and the first user interaction model defines how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the first element of the user interface;

while displaying the user interface, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to the first element of the user interface; and

176

DK 2016 70725 A1 in response to detecting the input:

18. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, one or more input devices, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to:

display, on the display, a user interface for a first software application, wherein:

the user interface includes a plurality of elements to which user interaction models from a plurality of user interaction models provided by an application-independent module have been assigned, the plurality of elements including a first element to which a first user interaction model has been assigned, the plurality of elements having content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application; and the first user interaction model defines how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the first element of the user interface;

while displaying the user interface, detect, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to the first element of the user interface; and in response to detecting the input:

update the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the input;

and in accordance with a determination that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, generate a first tactile output corresponding to the input; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, forgo generation of the first tactile output.

177

DK 2016 70725 A1

19. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

one or more input devices;

one or more tactile output generators;

means for displaying, on the display, a user interface for a first software application, wherein:

means, enabled while displaying the user interface, for detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed to the first element of the user interface; and means, enabled in response to detecting the input, including:

means for updating the user interface on the display based on characteristics of the input;

means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, for generating a first tactile output corresponding to the input; and means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, for forgoing generation of the first tactile output.

20. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, one or more input devices, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

the user interface includes a plurality of elements to which user interaction models from a plurality of user interaction models provided by an application-independent module have been assigned, the plurality of elements including a first element to which a

178

DK 2016 70725 A1 first user interaction model has been assigned, the plurality of elements having content provided by an application-specific module for the first software application; and the first user interaction model defines how the user interface responds to inputs directed to the first element of the user interface;

21. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

one or more input devices;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 1-16.

22. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, one or more input devices, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 1-16.

23. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, one or more input devices, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to

179

DK 2016 70725 A1 execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 1-16.

24. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

one or more input devices;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any of the methods of items 1-16.

25. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, one or more input devices, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 1-16.

26. An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces; one or more input device units configured to receive inputs;

one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the one or more input device units, and the one or more tactile output generator units, the processing unit configured to:

enable display, on the display unit, of a user interface for a first software application, wherein:

while enabling display of the user interface, detect, via the one or more input device units, an input directed to the first element of the user interface; and in response to detecting the input:

180

DK 2016 70725 A1 update the user interface on the display unit based on characteristics of the input;

in accordance with a determination that the input meets tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, enable generation of a first tactile output corresponding to the input; and in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the first user interaction model, forgo enabling generation of the first tactile output.

27. The device of item 26, wherein the processing unit is further configured to update the user interface on the display unit based on characteristics of the input and the first user interaction model.

28. The device of item 26, wherein the processing unit is further configured to: assign the first user interaction model to the first element using a predefined application programming interface (API).

29. The device of item 26, wherein the plurality of elements includes a second element to which a second user interaction model from the plurality of user interaction models provided by the application-independent module has been assigned, and the processing unit is further configured to:

while enabling display of the user interface, detect, via the one or more input device units, a second input directed to the second element of the user interface; and, in response to detecting the second input directed to the second element of the user interface:

update the user interface on the display unit based on characteristics of the detected second input; and in accordance with a determination that the second input meets tactile output criteria specified by the second user interaction model, enable generation of a second tactile output corresponding to the second input; and in accordance with a determination that the second input does not meet the tactile output criteria specified by the second user interaction model, forgo enabling generation of the second tactile output.

181

DK 2016 70725 A1

30. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the first element includes a slider object generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating tactile outputs in accordance with user manipulation of the slider object with touch inputs.

31. The device of item 30, wherein the processing unit is further configured to enable generation of a predefined modulation selection tactile output in response to a touch input that selects a modulation type for the slider object.

32. The device of item 30, wherein the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output in accordance with a modulation type of the slider object and a parameter of the first software application modulated in accordance with user manipulation of the slider object with touch inputs.

33. The device of item 30, wherein the first user interaction model specifies generating a distinct tactile output in accordance with a moveable portion of the slider object reaching an end position.

34. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the first element includes a switch object generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input corresponds to an action that changes a state of the switch object.

35. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the first element includes a value selection object generated at least in part based on information provided by the applicationspecific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input corresponds to an action that changes a value selected using the value selection object.

36. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the first element includes content that is refreshed in response to a pull down gesture reaching a refresh threshold, and the first user interaction model specifies generating a predefined impact tactile output in accordance with a determination that the input corresponds to a pull down gesture reaching the refresh threshold.

182

DK 2016 70725 A1

37. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the first element includes a region or object, the size of which changes in response to the input comprising a zoom gesture, and the first user interaction model specifies generating a predefined size limit tactile output in accordance with a determination that the size of the region or object has reached a predefined limit.

38. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the first element includes a table, having cells organized in rows and columns, generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input moves from any cell in the table to any other cell in the table, or moves from outside the table to a cell inside the table.

39. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the first element includes a table, having cells organized in rows and columns, generated at least in part based on information provided by the application-specific module for the first software application, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when two or more rows of the cells are reordered in response to the input.

40. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the input causes the first software application to select an item, in a collection of distinct items, to be moved to a predefined position within the first element, and the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output in conjunction with the selected item being moved to the predefined position within the first element.

41. The device of any of items 26-29, wherein the first user interaction model specifies generating the first tactile output when the input or an object manipulated in accordance with the first input approaches a next predefined state, and generating a second tactile output, distinct from the first tactile output, when the first input or an object manipulated in accordance with the first input reaches the next predefined state.

183

DK 2016 70725 A1

42. A method, comprising:

at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators:

displaying, on the display, a user interface;

detecting an occurrence of a first condition that triggers a first user interface event that is associated with a tactile output, wherein:

generating the first user interface event includes displaying one or more changes to the user interface; and the device will not be able to generate the tactile output associated with the first user interface event for a respective amount of time; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds to a first user interface event category:

delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time; and after delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time, displaying the one or more changes to the user interface and generating the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event, wherein the display of the one or more changes to the user interface is synchronized with the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event.

43. The method of item 42, including, when the respective amount of time is a first amount of time, delaying displaying the one or more changes to the user interface for the first amount of time, and when the respective amount of time is a second amount of time, delaying displaying the one or more changes to the user interface for the second amount of time.

44. The method of item 42 or 43, including, in response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds to a second user interface event category, displaying the one or more changes to the user interface before the respective amount of time has elapsed and generating the tactile output that is associated with the one or more changes in the user interface after the respective amount of time has elapsed.

184

DK 2016 70725 A1

45. The method of item 44, wherein:

the first user interface event category includes events where the respective amount of time for the one or more changes to the user interface is flexible; and the second user interface event category includes events where the respective amount of time for the one or more changes to the user interface is inflexible.

46. The method of item 44, wherein:

the first user interface event category includes events where the one or more changes to the user interface do not simulate direct manipulation of the user interface by user inputs; and the second user interface event category includes events where the one or more changes to the user interface simulate direct manipulation of the user interface by user inputs.

47. The method of any of items 42-46, including:

detecting a user input on the touch-sensitive surface that triggers a second user interface event that is associated with a tactile output, wherein generating the second user interface event includes displaying one or more changes to the user interface; and, in response to detecting the user input on the touch-sensitive surface, displaying the one or more changes to the user interface for the second user interface event and generating the tactile output that is associated with the second user interface event, wherein a first time interval between the display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the first user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event is less than a second time interval between the display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the second user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the second user interface event.

48. The method of any of items 42-47, wherein the occurrence of the first condition includes detected movement of the electronic device that meets predefined input pattern criteria and the one or more changes to the user interface include undoing a previously performed operation.

49. The method of any of items 42-47, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a

185

DK 2016 70725 A1 determination that the first user interface event is a notification event that does not correspond to a user input currently detected on the touch-sensitive surface.

50. The method of any of items 42-49, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with receiving electronically delivered information from an information source external to the electronic device.

51. The method of any of items 42-50, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with receiving electronically delivered information from an application executed by the electronic device and independent of any user input on the touch-sensitive surface that is detected at the same time as, or immediately preceding, the notification event.

52. The method of any of items 42-47, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with completion of a transaction initiated by a user of the electronic device.

53. The method of any of items 42-52, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is provided to an application programming interface (API) with a value indicating that the one or more changes to the user interface can be delayed until the device is ready to generate the tactile output.

54. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

186

DK 2016 70725 A1 displaying, on the display, a user interface;

55. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to:

display, on the display, a user interface;

detect an occurrence of a first condition that triggers a first user interface event that is associated with a tactile output, wherein:

187

DK 2016 70725 A1 delay generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time; and after delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time, display the one or more changes to the user interface and generate the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event, wherein the display of the one or more changes to the user interface is synchronized with the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event.

56. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

means for displaying, on the display, a user interface;

means for detecting an occurrence of a first condition that triggers a first user interface event that is associated with a tactile output, wherein:

generating the first user interface event includes displaying one or more changes to the user interface; and the device will not be able to generate the tactile output associated with the first user interface event for a respective amount of time; and means, enabled in response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds to a first user interface event category, including:

means for delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time; and means, enabled after delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time, including means for displaying the one or more changes to the user interface and means for generating the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event, wherein the display of the one or more changes to the user interface is synchronized with the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event.

57. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

188

DK 2016 70725 A1 means for displaying, on the display, a user interface;

58. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 42-53.

59. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 42-53.

189

DK 2016 70725 A1

60. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 42-53.

61. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any of the methods of items 42-53.

62. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 42-53.

63. An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs;

one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generator units, the processing unit configured to:

enable display, on the display unit, of a user interface;

generating the first user interface event includes enabling display of one or more changes to the user interface; and the device will not be able to generate the tactile output associated with the first user interface event for a respective amount of time; and in response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds to a first user interface event category:

190

DK 2016 70725 A1 enable generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event;

delay generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time; and after delaying generating the first user interface event for at least the respective amount of time, enable display of the one or more changes to the user interface, wherein the display of the one or more changes to the user interface is synchronized with the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event.

64. The device of item 63, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, when the respective amount of time is a first amount of time, delay enabling display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the first amount of time, and when the respective amount of time is a second amount of time, delay enabling display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the second amount of time.

65. The device of item 63, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, in response to detecting the occurrence of the first condition, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface event corresponds to a second user interface event category, enable display of the one or more changes to the user interface before the respective amount of time has elapsed, wherein the tactile output that is associated with the one or more changes in the user interface is generated after the respective amount of time has elapsed.

66. The device of item 65, wherein:

67. The device of item 65, wherein:

the first user interface event category includes events where the one or more changes to the user interface do not simulate direct manipulation of the user interface by user inputs; and

191

DK 2016 70725 A1 the second user interface event category includes events where the one or more changes to the user interface simulate direct manipulation of the user interface by user inputs.

68. The device of item 63, wherein the processing unit is further configured to: detect a user input on the touch-sensitive surface unit that triggers a second user interface event that is associated with a tactile output, wherein generating the second user interface event includes enabling display of one or more changes to the user interface; and, in response to detecting the user input on the touch-sensitive surface unit, enable display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the second user interface event and enable generation of the tactile output that is associated with the second user interface event, wherein a first time interval between the display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the first user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the first user interface event is less than a second time interval between the display of the one or more changes to the user interface for the second user interface event and the generation of the tactile output that is associated with the second user interface event.

69. The device of any of items 63-67, wherein the occurrence of the first condition includes detected movement of the electronic device that meets predefined input pattern criteria and the one or more changes to the user interface include undoing a previously performed operation.

70. The device of any of items 63-67, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event that does not correspond to a user input currently detected on the touch-sensitive surface unit.

71. The device of any of items 63-67, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with receiving electronically delivered information from an information source external to the electronic device.

192

DK 2016 70725 A1

72. The device of any of items 63-67, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with receiving electronically delivered information from an application executed by the electronic device and independent of any user input on the touch-sensitive surface unit that is detected at the same time as, or immediately preceding, the notification event.

73. The device of any of items 63-67, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is a notification event initiated in accordance with completion of a transaction initiated by a user of the electronic device.

74. The device of any of items 63-67, wherein the determination that the first user interface event corresponds to the first user interface event category includes a determination that the first user interface event is provided to an application programming interface (API) with a value indicating that the one or more changes to the user interface can be delayed until the device is ready to generate the tactile output.

193

DK 2016 70725 A1

75. A method, comprising:

while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, receiving an indication that a user interaction has started, wherein:

a respective portion of the user interaction is associated with a tactile output;

and the low-power state is a state in which tactile outputs are generated with a first amount of latency;

in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, setting the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state at a first time, wherein the low-latency state is a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency; and after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state:

in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that the one or more tactile output generators are still in the low-latency state, generating the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the second amount of latency; and in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, transitioning the one or more tactile output generators from the low-latency state to the low-power state.

76. The method of item 75, including:

after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state:

in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output after the predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that the one or more tactile output generators have returned to the low-power state, generating the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the first amount of latency.

194

DK 2016 70725 A1

77. The method of any of items 75-76, wherein:

the low-power state of the one or more tactile output generators has a lower power consumption than the low-latency state; and the low-latency state has a lower latency for generating tactile outputs than the lowpower state.

78. The method of any of items 75-77, wherein the low-power state is a predefined inactive state of the one or more tactile output generators.

79. The method of any of items 75-78, wherein the low-latency state is selected from: a first low-latency state and a second low-latency state, wherein:

the first low-latency state consumes less power than the second low-latency state and has a higher latency than the second low-latency state.

80. The method of item 79, wherein the low-latency state is selected from the first lowlatency state and the second low-latency state by an operating system of the device based on energy conservation protocols used by the device.

81. The method of any of items 75-80, including, in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication does not meet tactile output generator preparation criteria, maintaining the one or more tactile output generators in the low-power state and forgoing setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state.

82. The method of any of items 75-81, wherein the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output includes location information corresponding to a touch input having a location on the touch-sensitive surface or a user interface object having a location on the touch-sensitive surface.

83. The method of item 82, further comprising determining a location of the tactile output in accordance with the location information for the user interaction.

84. The method of item 83, wherein the one or more tactile output generators include two or more tactile output generators, each having a corresponding location, or location and size, and determining the location of the tactile output includes determining the location of

195

DK 2016 70725 A1 the tactile output in accordance with the location information for the user interaction and the locations, or locations and sizes, of the two of more tactile output generators.

85. The method of any of items 75-84, including issuing from a first software application a command to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, wherein setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state is performed in response to the command issued by the first software application to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state.

86. The method of any of items 75 to 84, including issuing from a first software application a command to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, and at an operating system of the electronic device, receiving the issued command and making a determination of whether to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state.

87. The method of any of items 75 to 84, including determining, using an operating system of the electronic device, when to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state.

88. The method of item 87, wherein the operating system of the electronic device determines whether to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state in accordance with a state of the electronic device.

89. The method of item 87, wherein the operating system of the electronic device determines, in response to a first software application issuing a command to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, whether to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state in accordance with historical information concerning prior commands by the first software application to set the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state.

90. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and

196

DK 2016 70725 A1 memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:

a respective portion of the user interaction is associated with a tactile output; and the low-power state is a state in which tactile outputs are generated with a first amount of latency;

in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, setting one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state at a first time, wherein the low-latency state is a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency; and after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state:

in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that one or more tactile output generators are still in the low-latency state, generating the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the second amount of latency; and in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, transitioning the one or more tactile output generators from the low-latency state to the low-power state.

91. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to:

while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, receive an indication that a user interaction has started, wherein:

and

197

DK 2016 70725 A1 the low-power state is a state in which tactile outputs are generated with a first amount of latency;

in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, set one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state at a first time, wherein the low-latency state is a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency; and after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state:

in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that one or more tactile output generators are still in the low-latency state, generate the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the second amount of latency; and in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, transition the one or more tactile output generators from the low-latency state to the low-power state.

92. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

means, enabled while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, for receiving an indication that a user interaction has started, wherein:

means, enabled in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, for setting one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state at a first time, wherein the low-latency state is a

198

DK 2016 70725 A1 state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency; and means, enabled after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the lowlatency state, including:

means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that one or more tactile output generators are still in the low-latency state, for generating the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the second amount of latency; and means, enabled in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, for transitioning the one or more tactile output generators from the low-latency state to the lowpower state.

93. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means, enabled in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, for setting one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state at a first time, wherein the low-latency state is a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency; and means, enabled after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the lowlatency state, including:

means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile

199

DK 2016 70725 A1 output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that one or more tactile output generators are still in the low-latency state, for generating the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators with the second amount of latency; and means, enabled in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, for transitioning the one or more tactile output generators from the low-latency state to the lowpower state.

94. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 75-89.

95. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 75-89.

96. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 75-89.

97. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any of the methods of items 75-89.

200

DK 2016 70725 A1

98. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 75-89.

99. An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs;

while the one or more tactile output generator units are in a low-power state, receive an indication that a user interaction has started, wherein:

in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication meets tactile output generator preparation criteria, set the one or more tactile output generator units to a low-latency state at a first time, wherein the low-latency state is a state in which the tactile outputs are generated with a second amount of latency that is lower than the first amount of latency; and after setting the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state:

in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output before a predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that the one or more tactile output generator units are still in the low-latency state, enable generation of the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units with the second amount of latency; and

201

DK 2016 70725 A1 in accordance with a determination that a tactile output has not been generated for at least the predefined amount of time since the first time, transition the one or more tactile output generator units from the low-latency state to the low-power state.

100. The device of item 99, wherein the processing unit is further configured to:

after setting the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state: in accordance with a determination that the user interaction has reached the respective portion of the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output after the predefined amount of time since the first time has elapsed and that the one or more tactile output generator units have returned to the low-power state, enable generation of the tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units with the first amount of latency.

101. The device of item 99 or 100, wherein:

the low-power state of the one or more tactile output generator units has a lower power consumption than the low-latency state; and the low-latency state has a lower latency for generating tactile outputs than the lowpower state.

102. The device of item 99 or 100, wherein the low-power state is a predefined inactive state of the one or more tactile output generator units.

103. The device of item 99 or 100, wherein the low-latency state is selected from: a first low-latency state and a second low-latency state, wherein:

104. The device of item 103, wherein the low-latency state is selected from the first lowlatency state and the second low-latency state by an operating system of the device based on energy conservation protocols used by the device.

105. The device of item 99 or 100, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, in response to receiving the indication that the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output has started, in accordance with a determination that the indication does not meet tactile output generator preparation criteria, maintain the one or more tactile output

202

DK 2016 70725 A1 generator units in the low-power state and forgo setting the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state.

106. The device of item 99 or 100, wherein the user interaction that is associated with the tactile output includes location information corresponding to a touch input having a location on the touch-sensitive surface unit or a user interface object having a location on the touchsensitive surface unit.

107. The device of item 106, wherein the processing unit is further configured to determine a location of the tactile output in accordance with the location information for the user interaction.

108. The device of item 107, wherein the one or more tactile output generator units include two or more tactile output generator units, each having a corresponding location, or location and size, and determining the location of the tactile output includes determining the location of the tactile output in accordance with the location information for the user interaction and the locations, or locations and sizes, of the two of more tactile output generator units.

109. The device of any of items 99-108, wherein the processing unit is further configured to issue from a first software application a command to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state, wherein setting the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state is performed in response to the command issued by the first software application to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the lowlatency state.

110. The device of any of items 99-108, wherein the processing unit is further configured to issue from a first software application a command to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state, and receive, at an operating system of the electronic device, the issued command and making a determination of whether to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state.

111. The device of any of items 99-108, wherein the processing unit is further configured to determine, using an operating system of the electronic device, when to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state.

203

DK 2016 70725 A1

112. The device of item 111, wherein the operating system of the electronic device determines whether to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state in accordance with a state of the electronic device.

113. The device of item 111, wherein the operating system of the electronic device determines, in response to a first software application issuing a command to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state, whether to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state in accordance with historical information concerning prior commands by the first software application to set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state.

204

DK 2016 70725 A1

114. A method, comprising:

while a first type of event is associated with a first tactile output and a second type of event that is distinct from the first type of event is associated with a second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output by an application-independent module:

receiving first information from a first application;

in response to receiving the first information from the first application, generating a response to the first information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the first type, generating the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the second type that is distinct from the first type, generating, using the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output;

after generating the response to the first information, receiving second information from a second application that is distinct from the first application; and in response to receiving the second information from the second application, generating a response to the second information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the first type, generating the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the second type, generating the second tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators.

115. The method of item 114, further comprising, after generating the response to the first information and generating the response to the second information, changing the first tactile output associated with the first type of event by the application-independent module, including associating the first type of event with a third tactile output that is different from the first tactile output.

205

DK 2016 70725 A1

116. The method of item 115, including, after changing the tactile output associated with the first type of event by the application-independent module:

receiving third information from the first application;

in response to receiving the third information from the first application, generating a response to the third information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the third information corresponds to an application event of the first type, generating the third tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators;

after generating the response to the third information, receiving fourth information from the second application that is distinct from the first application; and in response to receiving the fourth information from the second application, generating a response to the fourth information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the fourth information corresponds to an application event of the first type, generating the third tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators.

117. The method of item 116, wherein the third information is received from an application-specific module for the first application, the fourth information is received from an application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the third tactile output is performed by the application-independent module.

118. The method of any of items 114-117, further comprising, after generating the response to the first information and generating the response to the second information, changing the tactile output associated with the second type of event by the applicationindependent module, including associating the second type of event with a fourth tactile output that is different from the second tactile output.

119. The method of item 118, including, after changing the tactile output associated with the second type of event by the application-independent module:

receiving fifth information from the first application;

in response to receiving the fifth information from the first application, generating a response to the fifth information, including:

206

DK 2016 70725 A1 in accordance with a determination that the fifth information corresponds to an application event of the second type, generating the fourth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators;

after generating the response to the fifth information, receiving sixth information from the second application that is distinct from the first application; and in response to receiving the sixth information from the second application, generating a response to the sixth information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the sixth information corresponds to an application event of the second type, generating the fourth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators.

120. The method of item 119, wherein the fifth information is received from an application-specific module for the first application, the sixth information is received from an application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the fourth tactile output is performed by the application-independent module.

121. The method of any of items 114-120, wherein the first information is received from an application-specific module for the first application, the second information is received from an application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the first tactile output or the second tactile output is performed by the applicationindependent module.

122. The method of any of items 114-121, wherein:

generating the response to the first information includes, in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of a third type that is associated with a fifth tactile output that is different from the first tactile output and the second tactile output and that is distinct from the first type and second type, generating, using the one or more tactile output generators, the fifth tactile output that is different from the first tactile output and the second tactile output; and generating the response to the second information includes, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the third type, generating the fifth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators.

207

DK 2016 70725 A1

123. The method of any of items 114-122, wherein the first type of event is a success event and the second type of event is a failure event.

124. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

while a first type of event is associated with a first tactile output and a second type of event that is distinct from the first type is associated with a second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output by an application-independent module:

receiving first information from a first application; in response to receiving the first information from the first application, generating a response to the first information, including:

208

DK 2016 70725 A1

125. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to:

receive first information from a first application;

in response to receiving the first information from the first application, generate a response to the first information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the first type, generate the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the second type that is distinct from the first type, generate, using the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output;

after generating the response to the first information, receive second information from a second application that is distinct from the first application; and in response to receiving the second information from the second application, generate a response to the second information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the first type, generate the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators; and, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the second type, generate the second tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators.

126. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and

209

DK 2016 70725 A1 means, enabled while a first type of event is associated with a first tactile output and a second type of event that is distinct from the first type is associated with a second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output by an application-independent module, including:

means for receiving first information from a first application;

means, enabled in response to receiving the first information from the first application, for generating a response to the first information, including:

means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the first type, for generating the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators; and means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the second type that is distinct from the first type, for generating, using the one or more tactile output generators, the second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output;

means, enabled after generating the response to the first information, for receiving second information from a second application that is distinct from the first application; and means, enabled in response to receiving the second information from the second application, for generating a response to the second information, including:

means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the first type, for generating the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators; and means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the second type, for generating the second tactile output using the one or more tactile output generators.

127. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means, enabled while a first type of event is associated with a first tactile output and a second type of event that is distinct from the first type is associated with a second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output by an application-independent module, including:

means for receiving first information from a first application;

210

DK 2016 70725 A1 means, enabled in response to receiving the first information from the first application, for generating a response to the first information, including:

128. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 114-123.

129. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a

211

DK 2016 70725 A1 display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 114-123.

130. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 114123.

131. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any of the methods of items 114-123.

132. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 114-123.

133. An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs;

receive first information from a first application; in response to receiving the first information from the first application, enable generation of a response to the first information, including:

212

DK 2016 70725 A1 in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enable generation of the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units;

in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of the second type that is distinct from the first type, enable generation, using the one or more tactile output generator units, of the second tactile output that is different from the first tactile output;

after enabling generation of the response to the first information, receive second information from a second application that is distinct from the first application; and in response to receiving the second information from the second application, enable generation of a response to the second information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enable generation of the first tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units; and, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the second type, enable generation of the second tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units.

134. The device of item 133, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, after enabling generation of the response to the first information and enabling generation of the response to the second information, change the first tactile output associated with the first type of event by the application-independent module, including associating the first type of event with a third tactile output that is different from the first tactile output.

135. The device of item 134, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, after changing the tactile output associated with the first type of event by the applicationindependent module:

receive third information from the first application;

in response to receiving the third information from the first application, enable generation of a response to the third information, including:

213

DK 2016 70725 A1 in accordance with a determination that the third information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enable generation of the third tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units;

after enabling generation of the response to the third information, receive fourth information from the second application that is distinct from the first application; and in response to receiving the fourth information from the second application, enable generation of a response to the fourth information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the fourth information corresponds to an application event of the first type, enable generation of the third tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units.

136. The device of item 135, wherein the third information is received from an application-specific module for the first application, the fourth information is received from an application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the third tactile output is performed by the application-independent module.

137. The device of any of items 133-136, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, after enabling generation of the response to the first information and enabling generation of the response to the second information, change the tactile output associated with the second type of event by the application-independent module, including associating the second type of event with a fourth tactile output that is different from the second tactile output.

138. The device of item 137, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, after changing the tactile output associated with the second type of event by the applicationindependent module:

receive fifth information from the first application;

in response to receiving the fifth information from the first application, enable generation of a response to the fifth information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the fifth information corresponds to an application event of the second type, enable generation of the fourth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units;

214

DK 2016 70725 A1 after enabling generation of the response to the fifth information, receive sixth information from the second application that is distinct from the first application; and in response to receiving the sixth information from the second application, enable generation of a response to the sixth information, including:

in accordance with a determination that the sixth information corresponds to an application event of the second type, enable generation of the fourth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units.

139. The device of item 138, wherein the fifth information is received from an application-specific module for the first application, the sixth information is received from an application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the fourth tactile output is performed by the application-independent module.

140. The device of any of items 133-139, wherein the first information is received from an application-specific module for the first application, the second information is received from an application-specific module for the second application, and determining whether to generate the first tactile output or the second tactile output is performed by the applicationindependent module.

141. The device of any of items 133-140, wherein:

enabling generation of the response to the first information includes, in accordance with a determination that the first information corresponds to an application event of a third type that is associated with a fifth tactile output that is different from the first tactile output and the second tactile output and that is distinct from the first type and second type, enabling generation, using the one or more tactile output generator units, of the fifth tactile output that is different from the first tactile output and the second tactile output; and enabling generation of the response to the second information includes, in accordance with a determination that the second information corresponds to an application event of the third type, enabling generation of the fifth tactile output using the one or more tactile output generator units.

142. The device of any of items 133-141, wherein the first type of event is a success event and the second type of event is a failure event.

215

DK 2016 70725 A1

143. A method, comprising:

receiving, at an application-independent module, from an application-specific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input directed to a user interface of the first application, wherein:

an operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module; and the information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input; and in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application, wherein:

the tactile output has the tactile output pattern specified by the applicationspecific module; and the tactile output has an amplitude determined in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input.

144. The method of item 143, wherein the tactile output is further characterized by a vibration frequency, wherein the vibration frequency is selected based on the tactile output pattem.

145. The method of item 144, wherein the vibration frequency is less than 100 hertz.

146. The method of any of items 143-145, wherein the amplitude of the tactile output is further determined in accordance with at least one of a velocity or mass of an object in a simulated collision or impact.

147. The method of any of items 143-145, wherein the amplitude of the tactile output is further determined by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of one or more displayed user interface elements or one or more parameters of a touch input.

216

DK 2016 70725 A1

148. The method of any of items 143-145, wherein the magnitude is provided by the first application.

149. The method of any of items 143-145, wherein the magnitude is provided by an operating system of the electronic device.

150. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

receiving, at an application-independent module, from an applicationspecific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input directed to the user interface of the first application, wherein:

the tactile output has the tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module; and the tactile output has an amplitude determined in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input.

217

DK 2016 70725 A1

151. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to:

receive, at an application-independent module, from an application-specific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input directed to the user interface of the first application, wherein:

an operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module; and the information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input; and in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, generate, via the one or more tactile output generators, a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application, wherein:

152. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

means for receiving, at an application-independent module, from an applicationspecific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input directed to the user interface of the first application, wherein:

an operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module; and

218

DK 2016 70725 A1 the information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input; and means, enabled in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, for generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application, wherein:

153. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

an operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module; and the information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input; and means, enabled in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, for generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application, wherein:

the tactile output has the tactile output pattem specified by the applicationspecific module; and the tactile output has an amplitude determined in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input.

154. An electronic device, comprising:

219

DK 2016 70725 A1 a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 143-149.

155. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 143-149.

156. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of 143-149.

157. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any of the methods of items 143-149.

158. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 143-149.

159. An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs;

one or more tactile output generator units configured to generate one or more tactile outputs; and

220

DK 2016 70725 A1 a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactile output generator units, the processing unit configured to:

receive, at an application-independent module, from an application-specific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input directed to a user interface of the first application, wherein:

an operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module; and the information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input; and in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, enable generation, via the one or more tactile output generator units, of a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application, wherein:

160. The device of item 159, wherein the tactile output is further characterized by a vibration frequency, wherein the vibration frequency is selected based on the tactile output pattern.

161. The device of item 160, wherein the vibration frequency is less than 100 hertz.

162. The device of any of items 159 to 161, wherein the amplitude of the tactile output is further determined in accordance with at least one of a velocity or mass of an object in a simulated collision or impact.

163. The device of any of items 159 to 161, wherein the amplitude of the tactile output is further determined by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of one or more displayed user interface elements or one or more parameters of a touch input.

221

DK 2016 70725 A1

164. The device of any of items 159 to 161, wherein the magnitude is provided by the first application.

165. The device of any of items 159 to 161, wherein the magnitude is provided by an operating system of the electronic device.

222

DK 2016 70725 A1

166. A method, comprising:

displaying a user interface on the display;

while displaying the user interface on the display and while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, detecting a first user interaction via the touchsensitive surface;

in response to detecting the first user interaction, setting the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state;

after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, detecting a second user interaction that is part of a same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction; and in response to detecting the second user interaction, generating a tactile output that corresponds to the second user interaction.

167. The method of item 166, wherein the first user interaction and the second user interaction are detected as part of a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface that traverses a sequence of components of the user interface displayed on the display.

168. The method of any of items 166-167, wherein the first user interaction is touchdown of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface.

169. The method of any of items 166-167, wherein the first user interaction is a change in a contact after detecting touchdown of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.

170. The method of any of items 166-169, wherein:

a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions;

the one or more tactile output generators are changed to the low-latency state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a start state in which the monitoring function has started monitoring the sequence of user interactions; and the tactile output is generated based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a changed state.

171. The method of any of items 166-169, wherein:

223

DK 2016 70725 A1 a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions;

the one or more tactile output generators are changed to the low-latency state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a changed state that precedes a changed state that corresponds to a tactile output; and the tactile output is generated based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered the changed state that corresponds to a tactile output.

172. The method of any of items 166-171, including: detecting an end of the sequence of user interactions; and, in response to detecting the end of the sequence of user interactions, setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-power state.

173. The method of item 172, wherein a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions, and the one or more tactile output generators are set to the low-power state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered an end state.

174. The method of any of items 166-173, wherein the sequence of user interactions corresponds to a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface that traverses a sequence of components of a user interface displayed on the display, and the method further includes generating a sequence of two or more tactile outputs using identical waveforms.

175. The method of any of items 166-174, including, after generating the tactile output in response to detecting the second user interaction, forgoing generation of a subsequent tactile output in response to detecting a third user interaction that is part of the same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction and the second user interaction, in accordance with a determination that the third user interaction occurred less than a predefined time duration from the second user interaction.

176. The method of any of items 166-173, including scrolling a set of menu items in response to user input on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the sequence of user interactions comprises a sequence of respective menu items in the set of menu items scrolling to or through a selection position in the user interface.

224

DK 2016 70725 A1

177. The method of any of items 166-173, including scrolling a set of date component or time component items in response to user input on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the sequence of user interactions comprises a sequence of date component or time component items scrolling to or through a selection position in the user interface.

178. The method of any of items 166-173, wherein the sequence of user interactions corresponds to a touch input on the touch-sensitive surface that traverses a sequence of soft keys displayed on the display, and the method further includes generating one or more tactile outputs that correspond to the touch input reaching predefined positions with respect to the sequence of soft keys.

179. The method of any of items 166-173, wherein the sequence of user interactions includes a sequence of events corresponding to distinct phases of dragging an object, in the user interface displayed on the display, from an initial location to another location.

180. The method of item 179, wherein the distinct phases of dragging the object include an object lifting phase and an object dropping phase.

181. The method of any of items 179-180, wherein the distinct phases of dragging the object include an object snapping phase, corresponding to the object snapping into place with respect to a user interface feature, and the tactile output corresponds to the object snapping into place with respect to the user interface feature.

182. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

displaying a user interface on the display;

while displaying the user interface on the display and while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, detecting a first user interaction via the touch-sensitive surface;

225

DK 2016 70725 A1 in response to detecting the first user interaction, setting the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state;

183. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to:

display a user interface on the display;

while displaying the user interface on the display and while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, detect a first user interaction via the touchsensitive surface;

in response to detecting the first user interaction, set the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state;

after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the low-latency state, detect a second user interaction that is part of a same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction; and in response to detecting the second user interaction, generate a tactile output that corresponds to the second user interaction.

184. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

means for displaying a user interface on the display;

means, enabled while displaying the user interface on the display and while the one or more tactile output generators are in a low-power state, for detecting a first user interaction via the touch-sensitive surface;

226

DK 2016 70725 A1 means, enabled in response to detecting the first user interaction, for setting the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state;

means, enabled after setting the one or more tactile output generators to the lowlatency state, for detecting a second user interaction that is part of a same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction; and means, enabled in response to detecting the second user interaction, for generating a tactile output that corresponds to the second user interaction.

185. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for displaying a user interface on the display;

means, enabled in response to detecting the first user interaction, for setting the one or more tactile output generators to a low-latency state;

186. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 166-181.

187. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a

227

DK 2016 70725 A1 display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 166-181.

188. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 166181.

189. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any of the methods of items 166-181.

190. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 166-181.

191. An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs;

enable display of a user interface on the display unit;

while enabling display of the user interface on the display unit and while the one or more tactile output generator units are in a low-power state, detect a first user interaction via the touch-sensitive surface unit;

in response to detecting the first user interaction, set the one or more tactile output generator units to a low-latency state;

228

DK 2016 70725 A1 after setting the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-latency state, detect a second user interaction that is part of a same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction; and in response to detecting the second user interaction, enable generation of a tactile output that corresponds to the second user interaction.

192. The device of item 191, wherein the first user interaction and the second user interaction are detected as part of a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface unit that traverses a sequence of components of the user interface displayed on the display unit.

193. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein the first user interaction is touchdown of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.

194. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein the first user interaction is a change in a contact after detecting touchdown of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.

195. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein:

a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions; the one or more tactile output generator units are changed to the low-latency state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a start state in which the monitoring function has started monitoring the sequence of user interactions; and the tactile output is generated based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a changed state.

196. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein:

a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions; the one or more tactile output generator units are changed to the low-latency state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered a changed state that precedes a changed state that corresponds to a tactile output; and the tactile output is generated based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered the changed state that corresponds to a tactile output.

197. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein the processing unit is further configured to:

229

DK 2016 70725 A1 detect an end of the sequence of user interactions; and, in response to detecting the end of the sequence of user interactions, set the one or more tactile output generator units to the low-power state.

198. The device of item 197, wherein a monitoring function tracks a progress of the sequence of user interactions, and the one or more tactile output generator units are set to the low-power state based on a determination that the monitoring function has entered an end state.

199. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein the sequence of user interactions corresponds to a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface unit that traverses a sequence of components of a user interface displayed on the display unit, and the processing unit is further configured to enable generation of a sequence of two or more tactile outputs using identical waveforms.

200. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, after enabling generation of the tactile output in response to detecting the second user interaction, forgo generation of a subsequent tactile output in response to detecting a third user interaction that is part of the same sequence of user interactions as the first user interaction and the second user interaction, in accordance with a determination that the third user interaction occurred less than a predefined time duration from the second user interaction.

201. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein the processing unit is further configured to enable scrolling of a set of menu items in response to user input on the touchsensitive surface unit, wherein the sequence of user interactions comprises a sequence of respective menu items in the set of menu items scrolling to or through a selection position in the user interface.

202. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein the processing unit is further configured to enable scrolling of a set of date component or time component items in response to user input on the touch-sensitive surface unit, wherein the sequence of user interactions comprises a sequence of date component or time component items scrolling to or through a selection position in the user interface.

230

DK 2016 70725 A1

203. The device of any of items 191-192, wherein the sequence of user interactions corresponds to a touch input on the touch-sensitive surface unit that traverses a sequence of soft keys displayed on the display unit, and the processing unit is further configured to enable generation of one or more tactile outputs that correspond to the touch input reaching predefined positions with respect to the sequence of soft keys.

204. The device of item 191, wherein the sequence of user interactions includes a sequence of events corresponding to distinct phases of dragging an object, in the user interface displayed on the display unit, from an initial location to another location.

205. The device of item 204, wherein the distinct phases of dragging the object include an object lifting phase and an object dropping phase.

206. The device of any of items 204-205, wherein the distinct phases of dragging the object include an object snapping phase, corresponding to the object snapping into place with respect to a user interface feature, and the tactile output corresponds to the object snapping into place with respect to the user interface feature.

231

DK 2016 70725 A1

207. A method, comprising:

receiving a first request for a first user interface operation, wherein the first user interface operation is a first type of change in a respective user interface element that is associated with a first tactile output;

in response to receiving the first request:

performing the first user interface operation; and generating the first tactile output;

after performing the first user interface operation, receiving a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output;

in response to receiving the second request:

in accordance with a determination that the second request for the second user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with the second tactile output:

determining a time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the second request;

in accordance with a determination that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, performing the second user interface operation without generating the second tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, performing the second user interface operation and generating the second tactile output.

208. The method of item 207, wherein the time interval is determined from a beginning of the tactile output generated for the most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element to a beginning of the second tactile output, and the predefined time period is longer than a duration of the tactile output generated for the most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element.

232

DK 2016 70725 A1

209. The method of any of items 207-208, including, in response to receiving the second request:

in accordance with a determination that the second request for the second user interface operation does not comprise a request for an instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element, mixing the second tactile output with other tactile outputs generated by the one or more tactile output generators without regard to whether the time interval is less than the predefined time period.

210. The method of any of items 207-209, including:

after performing the second user interface operation, receiving a third request for a third user interface operation that is associated with a third tactile output;

in response to receiving the third request for the third user interface operation:

in accordance with a determination that the third request for the third user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with a third tactile output:

determining a second time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the third request;

in accordance with a determination that the second time interval is less than the predefined time period, performing the third user interface operation without generating the third tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that the second time interval is greater than the predefined time period, performing the third user interface operation and generating the third tactile output.

211. The method of item 210, including, in response to receiving the third request:

in accordance with a determination that the third request for the third user interface operation does not comprise an instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element, mixing the third tactile output with other tactile outputs generated by the one or more tactile output generators without regard to whether the second time interval is less than the predefined time period.

233

DK 2016 70725 A1

212. The method of item 210, wherein the first and third tactile outputs are synchronized with first and third user interactions in a sequence of user interactions that correspond to a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface.

213. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

in response to receiving the first request:

after performing the first user interface operation, receiving a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output; and in response to receiving the second request:

in accordance with a determination that the second request for the second user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with a second tactile output:

in accordance with a determination that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, performing the second user interface operation without generating the second tactile output; and

234

DK 2016 70725 A1 in accordance with a determination that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, performing the second user interface operation and generating the second tactile output.

214. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to:

receive a first request for a first user interface operation, wherein the first user interface operation is a first type of change in a respective user interface element that is associated with a first tactile output;

in response to receiving the first request:

perform the first user interface operation; and generate the first tactile output;

after performing the first user interface operation, receive a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output; and in response to receiving the second request:

determine a time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the second request;

in accordance with a determination that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, perform the second user interface operation without generating the second tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, perform the second user interface operation and generating the second tactile output.

215. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

235

DK 2016 70725 A1 a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

means for receiving a first request for a first user interface operation, wherein the first user interface operation is a first type of change in a respective user interface element that is associated with a first tactile output;

means, enabled in response to receiving the first request, including: means for performing the first user interface operation; and means for generating the first tactile output;

means, enabled after performing the first user interface operation, for receiving a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output; and means, enabled in response to receiving the second request, including:

means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the second request for the second user interface operation comprises a request for an instance of the first type of change in the user interface that is associated with a second tactile output, including:

means for determining a time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the second request;

means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, for performing the second user interface operation without generating the second tactile output; and means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, for performing the second user interface operation and generating the second tactile output.

216. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means, enabled in response to receiving the first request, including:

236

DK 2016 70725 A1 means for performing the first user interface operation; and means for generating the first tactile output;

217. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 207-212.

218. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a

237

DK 2016 70725 A1 display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 207-212.

219. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 207212.

220. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any of the methods of items 207-212.

221. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 207-212.

222. An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs;

in response to receiving the first request:

perform the first user interface operation; and enable generation of the first tactile output;

after performing the first user interface operation, receive a second request for a second user interface operation that is associated with a second tactile output; and

238

DK 2016 70725 A1 in response to receiving the second request:

in accordance with a determination that the time interval is less than a predefined time period, perform the second user interface operation without enabling generation of the second tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that the time interval is greater than the predefined time period, perform the second user interface operation and enable generation of the second tactile output.

223. The device of item 222, wherein the time interval is determined from a beginning of the tactile output generated for the most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element to a beginning of the second tactile output, and the predefined time period is longer than a duration of the tactile output generated for the most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element.

224. The device of any of items 222-223, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, in response to receiving the second request:

in accordance with a determination that the second request for the second user interface operation does not comprise a request for an instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element, mix the second tactile output with other tactile outputs generated by the one or more tactile output generator units without regard to whether the time interval is less than the predefined time period.

225. The device of any of items 222-224, wherein the processing unit is further configured to:

after performing the second user interface operation, receive a third request for a third user interface operation that is associated with a third tactile output;

239

DK 2016 70725 A1 in response to receiving the third request for the third user interface operation:

determine a second time interval from a point in time corresponding to a most recent prior instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element for which a tactile output was generated to a point in time corresponding to the first type of change in the respective user interface element requested by the third request;

in accordance with a determination that the second time interval is less than the predefined time period, perform the third user interface operation without enabling generation of the third tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that the second time interval is greater than the predefined time period, perform the third user interface operation and generate the third tactile output.

226. The device of item 225, wherein the processing unit is further configured to, in response to receiving the third request:

in accordance with a determination that the third request for the third user interface operation does not comprise an instance of the first type of change in the respective user interface element, mix the third tactile output with other tactile outputs generated by the one or more tactile output generator units without regard to whether the second time interval is less than the predefined time period.

227. The device of item 225, wherein the first and third tactile outputs are synchronized with first and third user interactions in a sequence of user interactions that correspond to a continuous touch input on the touch-sensitive surface unit.

240

DK 2016 70725 A1

228. A method, comprising:

at an application-independent module, receiving user interface information from an application, wherein the user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an application-specific module of the application;

receiving an input directed toward one or more of the displayed user interface elements;

at the application-independent module, determining one or more tactile outputs to be generated based on a magnitude of the input and the one or more dimensions defined by the applications-specific module; and using the one or more tactile output generators, generating the determined one or more tactile outputs.

229. The method of item 228, wherein the application-independent module comprises, or is included in, an operating system of the electronic device.

230. The method of item 228, wherein the application-independent module determines a magnitude of the one or more tactile outputs by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of the received input.

231. The method of item 228, wherein the application-independent module determines whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether an edge of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined boundary.

232. The method of item 228, wherein the application-independent module determines whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether a parameter of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined limit.

233. The method of item 228, wherein the application-independent module determines whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether an edge of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined boundary, and whether a respective user touch input is detected.

241

DK 2016 70725 A1

234. The method of item 228, wherein the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include an extent of a user interface element and an extent that the user interface element can be temporarily scrolled beyond an edge of a display region.

235. The method of item 228, wherein the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include a maximum zoom size of a user interface element and an amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the maximum zoom size.

236. The method of item 228, wherein the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include a minimum zoom size of a user interface element and an amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the minimum zoom size.

237. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

at an application-independent module, receiving user interface information from an application, wherein the user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an applicationspecific module of the application;

238. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a

242

DK 2016 70725 A1 display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to:

at an application-independent module, receive user interface information from an application, wherein the user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an application-specific module of the application;

receive an input directed toward one or more of the displayed user interface elements;

at the application-independent module, determine one or more tactile outputs to be generated based on a magnitude of the input and the one or more dimensions defined by the applications-specific module; and using the one or more tactile output generators, generate the determined one or more tactile outputs.

239. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

means for receiving, at an application-independent module, user interface information from an application, wherein the user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an application-specific module of the application;

means for receiving an input directed toward one or more of the displayed user interface elements;

means for determining, at the application-independent module, one or more tactile outputs to be generated based on a magnitude of the input and the one or more dimensions defined by the applications-specific module; and means for using the one or more tactile output generators, generating the determined one or more tactile outputs.

240. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

243

DK 2016 70725 A1 means for receiving, at an application-independent module, user interface information from an application, wherein the user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an application-specific module of the application;

241. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 228-236.

242. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 228-236.

243. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 228236.

244. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

244

DK 2016 70725 A1 a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing any of the methods of items 228-236.

245. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, comprising:

means for performing any of the methods of items 228-236.

246. An electronic device, comprising:

a display unit configured to display one or more user interfaces;

a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive touch inputs;

receive, at an application-independent module, user interface information from an application, wherein the user interface information corresponds to one or more displayed user interface elements with one or more dimensions defined by an applicationspecific module of the application;

determine, at the application-independent module, one or more tactile outputs to be generated based on a magnitude of the input and the one or more dimensions defined by the applications-specific module; and enable generation of the determined one or more tactile outputs using the one or more tactile output generator units.

247. The device of item 246, wherein the application-independent module comprises, or is included in, an operating system of the electronic device.

248. The device of item 246, wherein the application-independent module determines a magnitude of the one or more tactile outputs by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of the received input.

245

DK 2016 70725 A1

249. The device of item 246, wherein the application-independent module determines whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether an edge of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined boundary.

250. The device of item 246, wherein the application-independent module determines whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether a parameter of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined limit.

251. The device of item 246, wherein the application-independent module determines whether to generate a respective tactile output based on whether an edge of a respective element, of the displayed user interface elements, has passed a predefined boundary, and whether a respective user touch input is detected.

252. The device of item 246, wherein the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include an extent of a user interface element and an extent that the user interface element can be temporarily scrolled beyond an edge of a display region.

253. The device of item 246, wherein the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include a maximum zoom size of a user interface element and an amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the maximum zoom size.

254. The device of item 246, wherein the one or more dimensions of the user interface elements include a minimum zoom size of a user interface element and an amount by which the user interface element can be temporarily zoomed beyond the minimum zoom size.

[00563] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

246

DK 2016 70725 A1

Appendix A

247

DK 2016 70725 A1

UIFeedbackGenerator (AP

Motivation

Architecture Overview

Here’s a diagram of the feedback architecture.

UIKit sits on top of CoreAudio to play audio and haptic feedback, and provides a high level API called UIFeedbackGenerator, It is a semantic layer, a representation of a user interaction that would result in haptic and/or audio feedback, it takes input from the user interface and processes that input to generate and play feedback.

For example, we want the same feedback when:

* spinning a wheel in a UIDatePicker to change the selected date * highlighting different Home Screen Quick Actions when you 3D Touch on an app icon * selecting different diacritics in the keyboard

These three use cases are ali represented by the same Selection feedback generator.

The list of feedback generators we plan to expose are:

’ Selection (selection changes) * Impact (collisions and detents) ⁸ Notification (spontaneous notifications)

This architecture aiiows UIKit to change how feedback generators feel across the entire system without changing each of the use sites. This design lets us iterate quickly with Hi on haptics for system-wide interactions. Adopting feedback generators is easy for clients and minimally invasive to their existing code, even for feedback generators that perform complex processing of inputs to determine the appropriate feedback to play. Finally, by providing a limited set of well-defined feedback generators, we can ensure some degree of consistency in how feedback is used across the entire system.

248

DK 2016 70725 A1

The only feedback APIs we plan to expose for Whitefail are a handful of feedback generator classes inheriting from UiFeedbackGenerator.

Base class — UiFeedbackGenerator

Objective-C

NSfeiMfeAwymi: jmcib

- <wld/>eeparej

Swift gewtlebltefeOS fe

Oese ( fere peeparefe

UiFeedbackGenerator is the base abstract ciass for ali our feedback generators, it cannot be directiy instantiated.

When directly calling feedback generating methods on feedback generator classes, UIKIt first needs to bring up the underlying software and hardware stack, which incur a significant latency before the feedback is actually played (around 200ms).

To alleviate this problem, the UiFeedbackGenerator base class contains the method prepare which is used to get everything ready for imminent feedback. This method can be called multiple times, and it's fine if no feedback is triggered after it. Once prepared, the latency is significantly lowered to around 60ms.

When prepared, a feedback generator is using expensive software and hardware resources so it should be kept in that state for a iimited duration. It will go back to an idle state after a short time or until the object is deallocated.

Example

Objective-C // prepare the feetebeefe ^earaPerr We PeWteefe

249

DK 2016 70725 A1 // ba sawthirg o© ttw WWi gerwatar a little bit later // aith a riniaal frcbback isterry Ifea^backSaaaratar a«eth©.©g} |

Swift // prepare the taabbark gaatratar· tea taateaet taeahaict ”ea^Pa<kGen?rar o,^xora ' // be wtobg ae // eith a ai.rieal. <\ '\ \ ·, s© a Initio bit let -r teabbaahSaaarat:ar\.\' e'

Bush-in Feedback Generators

Selection Feedback Generator

The UlSelectionFeedbackGenerator is used when changing a selection. Objective-C

HS^LASOtAlk«LO::ii(ie..C) iiatarfaea ytielartieataabhacJÄaerater : biteabbaaklaaerater ' (vo a?selecttaaChaairbt

Swift

ac \h

The client just needs to cal I -seiectionChanged whenever the selection changes, which will trigger feedback to play.

250

DK 2016 70725 A1

Example

Changing the selection in a menu. ObjectiveC o J Se .1 ec fc 1 onF»tehac k<f>«ner«3 - ^palaeitanFaaGteateteteatar ® [(dl'Sateeticteaeclnacteermnatea allot ] Mit)!

// tea» tte w atarta lteeteteas< »ith the togtetne., // typically in tte laga» stte» te » ggtetet: tecegete er I steteti tetetetec iteateaian prapate]j . mmn t v o.se' »mm >\y' .// typically in tte ihanga» state te a- gastara· neaagydma·:-> // tete the selected uo» cteeg >

[^e.kecfciohFCi.'dteckft^nerator saiecCloteteng . dj.

Swift ) >i ml w ' >\m\ x. <m en ' χ e te m\ \m ' <. e ' // C C ' ' ' ' C ' x ' ' \ _v ' ' x \ x ' // typically in ite laga» state te a testete necateicrte aalarti»nlatepaatectec^:at:or <. gnepanat) / // tete < m ΙΛ»' x.\,xV mm 'g mm m ,'m ' *\ »v^atetet/ // typically in tte Ctetete stete te a gatette tegagtettum // »han tte tetectea te» thengcs ,&©.m'.. % ' » 'Λ- \ e te» \ 4 \ impact Feedback Generator

The UlimpactFeedbackGenerator is used for collisions and detents. Objective-C wdte te /h tetetecep m. UHteateteedteckte

251

DK 2016 70725 A1

LU tap i 2 r , St\ ie t i £ τ _x

B^yÄWslLAlii;

- (iriitaocety oUoit'^ithSty e _vulI^v^tFreeréLvckuty efrtUv R^JÆSK&JATRDjNi TIAtU 8;

\ ' ί \ U' X U \ ' '' ' <

- ( W W ) »P7:W We$ } fhmt

Swift @w» UTUpaetkeedbeckSTy 1© ( ca fe· Lig t, taedi sn_x heavy fpwl s i© ©, etoip u 7 l\'s l < <\ ' v· wc ' s»; s ' ? yxf wBbeckiepprMei- f telt(style; røpcWte^le) /// when th© cu< ieiRCt> something el -© fLMS iHpaiWreULUC >

UilmpactFeedbackGenerator generates feedback when items collide or cross a detent. The impact feedback generator is configured with a style representing the

252

DK 2016 70725 A1 overall magnitude of the impact (roughly, the ’’mass” of the item). The client calls -ImpactOccurred when an impact occurs. Example

An object crossing a detent and colliding. ObjectiveC

teoerat®r all u c 1 I e| Wit Pity re r // when peine abwt W hit wwthieg | l®peeWeWhtelÄrereWc prepere] // perlene roe a little hit lette ü'C e „rt? . >

_% n cedKu I U'Wtt'' u\ ''unrep/

// x's ' xCx e x r *„ * s'u' / lepeetFeedfeetÄewal: or x prepe«e<) // perle» these a little hit tatur <

// when e collislen etwrt l^paetleclbecklcetretor, ItpeetOteerr u<p }

Notification Feedback Generator

The UINotificationFeedbackGenerator is used for spontaneous notifications.

253

DK 2016 70725 A1

Objective-C ;:®§S

bv v L \uk AVAXLAÜlL i. G;iU U:

wxd Mbtif Iciti^ßOcAyrr· ed t

Swift < 1 bxC' i ? <. xt :,xW v-iVbUK \ '\ _% e ( case weæssy. wmlng^ v, c u aOS »,e_s *) <U X UDT>r XX U'Ut ί'Ή^<ίν4, ν,η'ί'νί'ΛΐΟΡ ' u\' CCdKN'HCrXt æ f fya« hdtiftCÄMnecAywed(t^w? t ' v ' - ca x\

s.

UI Notification FeedbackGenerator generates feedback for spontaneous notifications, generally triggered by seme asynchronous event occurring as a resuit of previous user interaction (e.g. shake to undo alert presents, Apple Pay payment succeeds).

The dient simply calls -notiflcationOccurred: passing the type of the notification, which will trigger the appropriate feedback.

Example

Displaying an alert controller with an error feedback.

254

DK 2016 70725 A1

Objective-C bikort?K TtienFee-.1ba<irteeee.-rtT''

ΠPXNotifiexrioBieedbackGetieratoi in tu // \ , Ss\ x ' i '* X ' V s ' C

Γnoti ti c a t ion Feedbac kGeno rotoo notifioaticmOtcimto d rtlkotirtcakienFeedbackTypeEu^ >?<j; Swift i »t notlrtoxrtorteedbuckGenenaton ® bl kot x ? i c o t i oo Fert hu< krti scoot ® ·„ ;

h'>t; irtrt o'iT 0<5\:t\k -<0' b' ot Ό ( 'V?3 o_x >

// rt«mlay o® alert eertert le® b®rt _v®erort to t i ti c at .ionf·' ^edbao krtn^ ned o „ no ?. x1 x c xt xonOv c urt ό < tv »e s

Existing first-party clients using JJiTaplicEngine will need to transition over to using the appropriate public or private UIFeedbackGenerator subclass, or the new UiPreviewinteraetion API for Peek & Pop.

What happens If I don't call prepare?

if you don’t call prepare, you’ll still get proper feedback playing but it may be delayed. Calling this method in advance is an optimization to ensure the best latency and feedback experience.

What happens If I call prepare constantly?

if you call prepare constantly, UIKit will try to honor it but might ignore your caiis at some point to prevent an app from keeping the hardware warm If not actually triggering feedback.

255

DK 2016 70725 A1

What happens if I call a method generating feedback on a feedback generator and then Immediately release/deailec it? Wiii the feedback still be felt?

Yes, because the feedback generator schedules feedback events on a different object so it’s not needed to actually play it. The hardware will go back to idle state as soon as the feedback is done playing - providing no other feedback generator is in play at the same time.

What if a third party client wants to have more complex haptics?

We currently don't support this but might in the future, either in UIKit or directly in CoreAudio.

Can a third party client disable or customize feedback on UIKit built-in controls?

No, we don't allow this to provide a unified experience across the system.

Let's look at the concrete example of a date picker.

The date picker is made of 4 independently spinnable wheels which can be rotated simultaneously. As a consequence, we'll use 4 instances of UlSeiectionFeedbackGenerator to provide feedback when a new item is selected in each one of them.

Selection Feedback Behavior

J

S'

A <·»*

A feature of the UlSeiectionFeedbackGenerator that is used by the date picker is that the pitch and volume of the audio and haptic are proportional to how fast the i

256

DK 2016 70725 A1 wheel is spinning. Each wheel will call selectionGhanged on its own feedback generator, which will calculate the speed based on the frequency of the calls. Then the feedback generator will internally modulate the feedback to provide a groat feeling for the end user.

Additionally, we want to limit the globai frequency of played feedback across all selection feedback generators, to avoid overflowing the user with vibrations.

To achieve this rich experience, each wheel of the date picker (assuming they are subclasses of UlScrollView) would need this simple code:

Objective-C

- s ituuveh & a catef/frame

X.

atlf - twee Ibifyithfntaetfbeaalt s? Osc/ceesen^: xmbackden .'r?:?? ®

JUlSe/ecticnFeecbacKcenei'etcc ail fp tt/// §·.

- (yaid/tbbal/WaÄllliegltOeaiilngi: (yKcttllWw rfeaeallVlÄ <

// |tt tlw feadfeaafe pwW wady fan feedback ta was w aa sfaef teeatting (se f. wIwtitnwedbwkGerweator· ps egs th

- <w/f)abwllVlaa01dfera Ou( <

// keep tha /tad hack pee when needy fan fwAaak as lati as *?/? &e eelM eg e wrbv'bAtc·' patbartla

257

DK 2016 70725 A1

258

DK 2016 70725 A1

Appendix Β

259

DK 2016 70725 A1

UIFeedbackGenerator additions

Architecture Overview

Here's a diagram showing the overview of the system.

Let's explore these layers one by one, starting from the bottom.

Low-tevek Core Audio AVHapticPSayer end System Sound Services

AVHapficPIayer is the low-level entry point into the haptic system for D1x phones only. This layer is vended by Core Audio, it aiiows UIKit to drive discrete haptics and modulate continuous ones. It also lets UIKit inform the system about how to prioritize haptic requests. The intent is for this layer to be consumed only by UIKit in WhitetaiL This will keep UIKit as the only client of AVHapticPIayer, and allow us to iterate quickly on different haptic feelings.

The Core Audio System Sound Services APIs can play legacy haptics (e.g.

N86/N71 peek & pop haptics) as well as sounds (e.g. keyboard clicks, device löck/unSock sounds). The new UIKit UiFeedback stack uses System Sound Services to play those sounds and legacy haptics for pre-D1 x hardware, and as well as system sounds that we want to play alongside haptic feedback on D1x.

Note that although this is API, the SSIDs containing haptics are private.

260

DK 2016 70725 A1

Mid-level: UIKh UlFeedback

The UlFeedback class represents playable feedback, which could be haptic and/or audio. There are subclasses for different use cases: UIDiscreteFeedback for discrete one-off haptics (e.g. Peek” or Pop), UIGontinuousFoedback for continuous haptics (e.g. a continuous vibration), and UIFeedbackPattern which can compose multiple discrete and continuous feedback into a more complex pattern.

When a UlFeedback instance is told to play, it Is handed over to a UIFeedbackEngine which is responsible for using the low-level Core Audio APIs to prepare the hardware and then schedule & play the feedback.

This UlFeedback layer is consumed primarily by UIKit fo implement the highlevel UIFeedbackGenerator API described below. Internal clients with exceptional needs can use UlFeedback directly, but such cases are extremely limited (currently there are none).

High-level: UIKit UIFeedbackGenerator (API)

UIFeedbackGenerator is a high-level representation of a user interaction that would result in haptic and/or audio feedback.

To synchronize your UI with the feedback and make sure both happen at the same time, you can call prepareWithGompletionHandler: and execute your Ui and feedback code in the handier, which wiii be called on the main thread. This will ensure that the feedback generated has a minima! latency and is experienced in sync with the Ui.

The success parameter informs you about whether feedback wiii actually be played for actions called inside the handler or not.

Example

If you want to display some UI which would be synchronized with a feedback.

Objecfive-C display icae bs hemp

If (WAAASS) <

/.·· do Ob the gpmemvt w // The IpWrey Tap the feedback bane aiU fea ASPiaal

261

DK 2016 70725 A1

The UiDragFeedbackGenerator is used for Interactive drag & drop and reordering. Objective-G

KF PcAFS AVAllARcc.JI. /Gid ø) .sdnteria e blPca^^eed-hackGe^efatoe j UIFeedbackdenenares sdlFeedhackGene^atoedsenlntenectiendciv uU oheA iϊΛν='><c len æcw tne CC'/OCC hacne οηΐρρ et

- (Wd.

, ut lsA'' l \' a\t s'VGv; ura x \\' ta κ c

- i\'' cs\fc u'kr er ?id x i xW'·' G GA \ . td ø' u e • »»X ·····. s. ••SJX».· ........ . ss ... s..^ .. ,s ·?. χ. ·>> ·> · · ,s· ’<χ .;·>.· ' ·.· ·> · ... ..-Λ.

ut ecdnac woiAi’ih¹»’ i ^s a' s'·./;? s'edn.KK<vntw'AU?r d t g ' e s \ s , ' p ' ,χ \ s 's S ' , .' cåH ahv« cbjVs't boznp O'cp/ce LandA into its Glnai £1V'.U L. Λ !f

- \ s (, s , λ > _v /// cgU. GA/n /Fe. hvtqeactwn: nada spnø qMjppé %napA: iin-ÅQ; anoGhW' positi n

- (vo

262

DK 2016 70725 A1

UIDragFeedbackGenerator generates feedback when items are dragged and reordered. The drag generator has a subclass UIDragSnappingFeedbackGenerator to be used when the dragged item wll snap into place.

The drag generator is user interaction driven, so the appropriate calls should be made when user interaction begins/ends/cancels. Then the client should call position Updated whenever the dragged item moves, and (if using the snapping style) call -snappedToFinalPosition when the dragged item snaps into place. Example

Dragging and dropping an object. ObjectiveG dlbnasj eedhac kOenenesto« gen enator withCec 'di nete$;

// rt ' ' χ ' rce , K ' . , // ri'K'.iGX Y' rtrt e o vt'Y't 'rt'Vrt' // ,rt «s χχ\χ ' 'X xx\^x' ' rt // rtvrtd i? v .rtou ϊ «' c s fWagitbeortm· ppsItidhWÄtedl ι // x e * e o' x \\ ' YY' χ // exosfipU moving fro»« one uneo fee anotn <

// rt X \ XX ' χ'*χ' xrt'O rt χ // 'bV ' V 'xx' Xx xx' /χΧ ' x Xx/x

Edge Feedback Generator

The UlEdgeFeedbackGenerator is used when reaching an edge or limit.

263

DK 2016 70725 A1

Objective-C

JtMXAWtABWuWCIO) i

// mteeæ fesfetefes she esse fefeeea fefes // x \ XX xx ^x W'-X x X« e x e e x' \ // coordinate spaces'· \ χ' χ proper'y t nonotom cj χ ts <§Wt] // estsotietyfeP/staaee specåfeee. We ww fe/few is // \ \ ' \*x X '' \ X X X \ ' X \ ' x ' X x ' \A 0 x' X x x

Ibhypthfe fePhiWtfe .VxHixU « ey '· xte fe χ eteWs/Wfesfe/fesoefe: Mo // xtttex sx tex x ' X fe ' ' // rexttwxn rwtexl .v *teVr?' »'»\\-λ·'3ΝΝ>,·! a

-. · vo ^positionbpaat fe... Cdrlo sOpocit.i mj is ' XX x\ .Λ \ x ' x ' χ '' fe χ χ X ' e χ ' χ χ x X« x X <' ' x H fefexx'te-xesfe >'tetene' xrix'x' tphepwty feoÄotc) Cfftofe fp/ypphfe fephafeaife €®O.rä // the «tq«» seer« scale »bien ca^ Pe reached temporärIfe Wen zoo^xog out past the mniinuss^oæSca e fprepehfe OFlWt

264

DK 2016 70725 A1 // TAO LxDx'A' xxK ' x 'χ ' XI ! \ X ' x x \ ' x\ W

A ' x x x ' x ' \ x x x ' x x' m X x fpmptcty ClOwT Ailey (vo dtocoxGcaieupdaf Ό, (CGFle gIzoa^Sci e, mb

NS ASsUNti _fc£W: L < f Nfe

UlEdgeFeedbackGenerator generates feedback when an edge or limit is reached and/or exceeded. Each edge generator is created with a style for the particular use, which affects the feedback that is generated. The edge generator is onedimensional, and is configured for a single axis. It is also configured with a distance (i.e. the size of the view in that axis) and an extentBeyondDistance (i.e. the maximum rubber band distance; how far beyond the distance can the position move).

UIZoomEdgeFeedbackGenerator is a subclass of edge generator that generates feedback when a zoom limit is reached and/or exceeded. It is configured with minimum and maximum zoom scales, as well as minimum/maximum temporary zoom scales (the equivalent rubber band effect for zooming).

Both the edge and zoom edge generators are user interaction driven, so the appropriate calls should be made when user interaction begins/ends/cancels. Then the client just needs to call -positionUpdated: or -zoomScaleUpdated: whenever the value changes. The generator processes these inputs to play feedback; for example, when an edge is reached the generator plays a haptic with an intensity proportional to the velocity at that time.

Example

Implementing a slider-like UlControl subclass.

Swift

Glsms ; UlCpntml <

let ebgeSwAnatw ·» (AddHtFateSpAcet wit) evenni e tu x; touch w. S awfeTfou withFv^nt eye c; UHve tto /

265

DK 2016 70725 A1 se lf χ w _% y termerwtteeSWrt )

I wtrrtdt few t®ychwRwid(t®ethtst SetWXTWchw mthgwtt 8ve>st; ülbett <

// , .<

l >t [\'viLrn -. '' wc η» x te ' >

sexf xCdgeGenerat »rx^'csiticnVpdxit 'Uxpesi.tS.an: positl m?

Ϊ eve ' e \ x m χ \\b x' \ x^x' \ xxbw^ ew t?: U'ls<e t? 3 ( // ,,,

Sx' I 'x^xX'C ' »r XX ' ' x - x'' ' ' x' wwtåde i wc : S tTPwT.

ewnt? vlbtl; <

// X..XX s® tf x edpaCeeerat uw ewrlaterwt udi) t

I

Objective-C <id) mi i

X _:<: X

266

DK 2016 70725 A1 gaaeepterÄ : e r w!T x (yo ,g_?tOM.ehesYp n' <NSSet YTouehes withsve γ. (UIEvoy forvent ( // to© f,©dg©b©n©ralor 'Mujfo'Mrt >d ;

y

I

Additions to UIKit components

Several components of UI Kit have adopted feedback and expose new APIs to control how the produce this feedback. They take the form of the generator property being exposed, which can either be set to nil to remove the feedback for this

267

DK 2016 70725 A1 generator, or to a different object if the client wants a custom feedback experience (typically, the same object created with a different style).

Exposing the feedback generators instead of just boolean properties allows for future API extension without needing to change all the LI I Kit component APIs again and focus only on the feedback generator class and subclasses.

UlSwitch API Additions

UlSwitch uses the retarget generator to provide feedback when the switch flips value.

Objective-C ^pepper ty st.Rmg* m sd

UlPickerView API Additions

UlPickerView uses the retarget generator to provide feedback when a component (wheel) of the picker view changes selection.

Objective-C st re ng lab x e) Ut iet

UIDatePicker API Additions

UIDatePicker uses the retarget generator to provide feedback when a component (wheel) of the date picker changes selection.

Objective-C

./ •^$ retarget kfewit or

268

DK 2016 70725 A1 s®

UIRefreshControl API Additions

UIRefreshControl uses the impact generator to provide feedback when the control begins refreshing.

Objective-C

UlScrollView API Additions

UlScrollView uses the edge generator to provide feedback when the user reaches an edge of the scrollable content area (where the rubber band effect begins), as well as when the user reaches a zoom limit when pinching with two fingers. Because scroil view can scroil horizontally and vertically, It uses two separate edge generators, one per axis. It also uses one zoom edge generator.

Objective-C

Mortal! t rtwogy ry

UiSHder API Additions

UlSIlder uses the edge generator to provide feedback when the slider's thumb (indicator knob) reaches the left or right edge of the slider. Because slider is strictly horizontal, it exposes a single edge generator.

Objective-C

269

DK 2016 70725 A1

UlTableVtew API Additions

UlTableView uses the drag generator to provide feedback when the user reorders rows in the table view, and a retarget generator when the user switched to another section using the index ban

Objective-C ry strange wllafele) y

UlCollectionView API Additions

UlCollectionView uses the drag generator to provide feedback when the user reorders items in the collection view.

Objective-C (weatwj.Cs a* •m

270

DK 2016 70725 A1

Claims

What is claimed is:

1. A method, comprising:

at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators:

receiving, at an application-independent module, from an application-specific module that is associated with a first application, information about an input directed to a user interface of the first application, wherein:

an operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input is associated with a tactile output pattern specified by the application-specific module; and the information about the input includes information indicating a magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface in response to detecting the input; and in response to receiving the information about the input directed to the user interface of the first application, generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a tactile output that corresponds to the operation performed in the user interface of the first application, wherein:

the tactile output has the tactile output pattern specified by the applicationspecific module; and the tactile output has an amplitude determined in accordance with the magnitude of the operation performed in the user interface of the first application in response to detecting the input.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the tactile output is further characterized by a vibration frequency, wherein the vibration frequency is selected based on the tactile output pattem.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein the vibration frequency is less than 100 hertz.
4. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein the amplitude of the tactile output is further determined in accordance with at least one of a velocity or mass of an object in a simulated collision or impact.

271

DK 2016 70725 A1
5. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein the amplitude of the tactile output is further determined by applying a predefined physics model to one or more parameters of one or more displayed user interface elements or one or more parameters of a touch input.
6. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein the magnitude is provided by the first application.
7. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein the magnitude is provided by an operating system of the electronic device.
8. An electronic device, comprising: a display;

a touch-sensitive surface;

one or more tactile output generators;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 1-7.
9. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 1-7.

272

DK 2016 70725 A1